Home

CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)

1. E Sede ACTIVE OPEN snd SYN Passive OPEN CLOSE Y LISTEN CLOSE rev SYN SEND snd SYN ACK snd SYN N a N SYN rev SYN SYN RECEIVED SENT snd ACK a N J rcv ACK of SYN rev SYN ACK snd ACK CLOSE snd FIN ESTABLISHED CLOSE rev FIN 1 snd FIN snd ACK an CLOSED WAIT 1 J WAI rev FIN CLOSE rev ACK of FIN snd ACK snd FIN FIN WAIT 2 CLOSING LAST ACK rev ACK of FIN rev ACK of FIN rcv FIN snd ACK Timeout 2MSL TIME WAIT gt CLOSED sas OOO e SSS 239 TCP Status Transitions Appendix C 240 Appendix D ASCII Characters Bils 5107 9000 0001 0010 oom oroo oror omo om wx o 2 3 a 5s 6 7 ooo fo NUL DLE Space o e Je oor p son poa Ja ja ja ja voto j sm pe p e be R b b on p ex pe p hb Jo b kb s omo f o pea s ja jo F ja oror 5 emoa nak e B Je Ju je ju owo fe jack sw B je Je v F y on p e ewe p e w b w wo fe es en co e JH k h k w p m em p e Jr o o voo o wwo pa e ses poo o oo a oo o on e vw ese p KOTO mo fe F fs o mao p eR es e m h m o mo f so Rs b N p n ant FSi jus jj jo E 241 ASCII Characters Appendix D 242 Appendix E Maintenance The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can have a negative effect on
2. 158 Socket Applications Section 7 2 The MRES codes are shown in the following table along with the results they indicate Refer to 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes for details on response codes including the SRES Execution results o0 Normal completion Unit error controller error 7 2 Socket Applications The format of the following FINS commands partially differs when the sockets are used Page ull z7 7 2 1 Format The basic format of these commands is shown in the diagram below 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Number of bytes from AZ ey EA e AAA gt K Command Results storage area Parameters code Socket number Socket option Command Code Specifies the requested process Socket Option For the TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE or PASSIVE specifies whether or not the keep alive function is to be used For all other commands it is dis abled Set to 0 Socket Number Specifies the socket number for which the process is requested from 1 to 8 Results Storage Area Specifies the area to store the results of the requested process 159 Socket Applications Section 7 2 Parameters Specifies the parameters for the command code Parameters depend on the command being executed for details refer to the following pages 7 2 2 PLC Memory Areas The memory areas of the PLC that can be specified for results storage when executing commands from the PC are listed in the tabl
3. L TCP connection status The connection status for each TCP socket is stored by code in this word For details refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions Socket Services Parameter Area 1 to 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Offset Socket Socket No 1 No 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 m 18 m 88 Socket option UDP TCP socket number 1 to 8 1 m 19 m 89 Local UDP TCP port number 0000 to FFFF Hex 2 m 20 m 90 Remote IP address m 21 m 91 00000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex 4 m 22 m 92 Remote UDP TCP port number 0000 to FFFF Hex 5 m 23 m 93 Number of send receive bytes 0000 to 07CO Hex 1984 6 m 24 m 94 Send receive data address m 25 m 95 Same as FINS variable area designation method 8 m 26 m 96 Timeout value 0000 to FFFF Hex When socket services are requested by control bit manipulation the settings must be made in advance in a Socket Service Parameter Area The parame ters used will vary depending on the service requested For details refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 6 88 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 IP Address Display Setting Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 m 98 1 2 3 4 m 99 5 6 7 8 IP address 1 2 31 4 5 6 7 8 Hex If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to a value other than 0 0 0 0 this area words m 98 and m 99 will act as an IP A
4. Local FINS node number A _ Local IP address T 1 The connection is established y 2 The local device such as a personal computer sends notification that its Ethernet Unit server CPU Unit Local FINS node number B Local IP address S FINS node number is A eo 1 o a The FINS node number 3 The Ethernet Unit sends notification that its FINS node number is B is converted for each connection number Setting FINS TCP Connections 104 1 2 3 1 23 y 4 The internal node correspondence table is changed 5 It then becomes possible to send and receive FINS messages The procedure for setting FINS TCP connections involves the items described below The settings are made individually for each connection numbers 1 to 16 under FINS TCP settings in the Unit Setup Local Device Is Server iL es Set the server Set IP addresses for connected devices If the option for protection by IP addresses is checked set the IP address es for clients where connections are permitted This can be omitted Automatic FINS node address allocation If the client generally a personal computer supports FINS TCP and if it is to be used without setting a FINS node address the value set here from 239 to 254 can be allocated to the client Functions related to these settings are explained in detail in the Operat
5. Time Interval 10mirs 1 to Attached file name Destination Mail 6 a extension AAA A A ra Set Defaults Cancel Mem Contents O Dea Send Trigger Select a number as the trigger condition for send ing mail Up to eight trigger numbers can be regis tered Use send trigger Sets whether or not the selected mail trigger is to Not checked be enabled Send Mail Section 3 7 tem Defaul If this option is selected mail is sent whenever the Checked Mail Send Switch turns ON The Mail Send Switch is bit 03 of word n in the words allocated for CPU Bus Units n 1500 25 x unit number If this option is selected the value of a specified Not checked address is compared with a standard comparison value using one of the following comparison func tions and mail is sent whenever the condition is satisfied lt gt lt lt 5 SS Select the address for storing the comparison value from the drop down list Bit value If this option is selected mail is sent whenevera Not checked change specified bit turns ON or whenever it turns OFF Select the bit address from the drop down list below CPU If this option is selected mail is sent whenever any Not checked condition of the following conditions occur at the CPU Unit The drop down list at the right can be used to select which of these three are to serve as mail triggers e When a non fatal error occurs e When a fatal err
6. See note 2 UDP socket send Y request buffers 8 x 9 000 max PS See note 2 Te FINS send buffer 9 000 bytes max FTP service send buffer 4 096 bytes IP packet output queue 50 max x 1 500 bytes TCP socket send A request buffers 8 ra Network memory 248K bytes 237 Buffer Configuration Appendix B Network Memory Most of the buffers used for communications servicing by the Ethernet Unit are administered in a buffer config uration called network memory Network memory consists of 248K bytes of memory divided into short and long buffers The use of short and long buffers is determined by the status of the various services when the Ethernet Unit is running The capacity of all buffers cannot be used due to limits in the mounted memory capacity The status of the short and long buffers can be accessed by execution the FINS command MEMORY STATUS READ 2763 Note 1 The status of UDP and TCP socket reception request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764 2 The status of UDP and TCP socket send request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764 238 Appendix C TCP Status Transitions The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764
7. 1 990 bytes max broadcasting 1 462 bytes after FINS com mand code 137 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Note Specifications Data contents The following data is sent and received with the execution of each instruction SEND 090 Sends request for remote node to receive data and receives response data RECV 098 Sends request for remote node to send data and receives response data CMND 490 Sends any FINS command and receives response data Communications Ports O to 7 Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously port number Response moni 0000 tor time 2 s default 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6 553 5 s in 0 1 s increments specified by user Number of retries O to 15 retries 1 The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange be tween the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC BUS 2 Remote I O Systems 2 When broadcasting do not require a response Use the FINS UDP method for broadcasting 6 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas 138 Note The following table shows the I O data areas involved when SEND 090 and RECV 098 are used Oe O E00000 to E32767 See note 2 1 Data cannot be written to words AOOO to A447 in the Auxiliary Area 2 A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used For details regarding the EM Area refer to the operation manual for the PLC that is used Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 6 6 3 Usi
8. 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 2240 Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 176 Response code Description 0000 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS 0042 see note An error occurred EMSGSIZE 0045 A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description 0049 Duplicated port numbers EADDRINUSE 004A see note An error occurred ECONNREFUSED 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENE TUNREACH 0051 see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOS TUNREACH 0053 A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT No remote exists 0066 Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service 0080 An open request timeout error occurred 0081 Socket was closed during opening procedure 0082 Connection could not be established with the specified remote Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks 7 3 14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST Requests processing to open a TCP socket The socket will be connected to
9. Wenuitem Parameteritem Corresponding OX Pragrammer function Padesan Poos OOOO ssm ooo G Destination IP address is changed Unit Setup window Setup Tab Destination IP Address Change Dynamically dynamically Destination IP address is Not changed Unit Setup window Setup Tab Destination IP Address Change Dynamically dynamically Performance of socket service High Unit Setup window Setup Tab Performance of Socket Service High Speed Speed FINS TCP Protected Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Use IP address to protect SMTP Server Host name or IP Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Server specification type address POP Server Host name or IP Unit Setup window POP Tab Server specification type address Unit Setup window DNS Tab Retry timer SMTP Unit Setup window SMTP Tab IP address of DNS server Unit Setup window DNS Tab IP Address IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window SMTP Tab IP Address or Host name SNTP Server Host name or IP Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Server specification type address Local mail address Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Local mail address Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Port No Option Use POP before SMTP Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Use POP before SMTP 247 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G Menu item Parameter item Corresponding CX Programmer function POP e ndo POP TR IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window POP Tab P Address or Host name
10. Auto dynamic addresses from FINS node addresses Enabled for FINS UDP only e Automatic generation dynamic Auto dynamic e Automatic generation static Auto Static e P address table method Table used e Combined method Mixed Destination IP Address Select to dynamically change the remote destination IP address for Checked FINS UDP To prohibit dynamic changes deselect this box Change Dynami Change Dynamically cally Baud Rate Select the Ethernet baud rate for the Ethernet Unit Select either automatic detection or 10Base T For 100Base TX select automatic detection TCP IP keep alive Set the liveness checking interval When socket services using either FINS TCP or TCP IP are used the connection will be terminated if there 120 minutes is no response from the remote node either a server or client within the time set here Enabled for socket services using FINS TCP or TCP IP only Setting range 0 to 65 535 minutes This setting applies to the keep alive setting for each connection set with the FINS TCP tab IP Address Table Set the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS node addresses and IP addresses With FINS UDP this is enabled only when the IP address table method is set as the IP address conversion method IP Router Table Set when the Ethernet Unit is to communicate through the IP router with None nodes on another IP network segment FTP Sets the login name for conne
11. Sending Flag 80 TCP UDP Open Flag 80 FTP communications 16 FTP indicator 26 FTP server 7 9 20 51 troubleshooting 221 FTP Status Flag 82 H Holding Area 138 HOST indicator 26 Host name field 67 68 74 HTTP Tab 75 hub 11 35 connections cascade 36 stack 36 precautions 36 I O allocations 138 CIO Area 78 DM Area 86 I O tables creating 39 ICMP communications 16 status 193 indicators 25 troubleshooting 204 inspections 245 installation cables connections 38 Contact Output Units 37 location xxiii precautions 34 interlock circuits xxiv INTERNODE ECHO TEST 165 internode test 11 command 165 Interval time field 71 72 IOM extension 73 IOMRead command 6 73 IOMWrite command 6 73 IP Address field 62 65 68 74 Index IP Address Table field 63 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 189 IP addresses allocating 94 configuration 94 dynamic 9 setting 46 IP communications 16 IP addresses reading from Units 162 reading tables 189 IP router tables reading 191 status 192 IP Router Table field 63 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 191 IP router tables 49 K keep alive field 65 keep alive setting 19 49 L limit circuits xxiv LNK indicator 26 Local mail address field 67 locking devices precautions xxiv Login field 63 Low Voltage Directive xxvi M mail status 87 Mail Address 1 field 69 Mail Address 2 field 69 Mail address field 71
12. Subnet mask e CIDR is not used e Operation is performed with the default net work mask if the subnet mask specification is less than the network mask for each class FINS node address setting range e 1 to 254 IP address conversion Automatic e Dynamic only generation method TCP keep alive e No time setting Uses default setting FINS TCP e Server only for all connections Uses default setting TCP socket services e Socket option keep alive setting Yes e Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket Nos 1 to 8 Yes e Data Received Flag Yes e Socket high speed option No FTP server function e Port No setting No Uses default setting Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 Specifications in ETN11 mode Mail send function e The specifications for previous Units apply e The mail transmission status is as follows e Status of user mail transmission Status of transmission condition setting 5 e Status of periodic mail transmission Sta tus of transmission condition setting 6 e Status of mail transmission when error occurs Status of transmission condition setting 7 Mail receive function e Cannot be used Automatic clock adjustment function Cannot be used DNS server host name e Cannot be used Note 1 These limitations do not apply when the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format is in ETN21 mode 2 When I O tables are created using one of the new Ethernet Unit models the CPU Bus Unit System
13. The following example shows calculations for sending 256 words between two PLC nodes using SEND 090 Calculations are shown in the following table Conditions Local node CPU cycle time 10 ms Local node CPU execution mode Normal Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Remote node CPU cycle time 5 ms Remote node CPU execution mode Normal Remote node CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 Baud rate 100Base TX Cem Calculation CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service processing time 0 4 ms local node Transmission processing time 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms Reception processing time 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time 0 2 ms remote node Total 10 04 1 1 03 15 5 0 2 18 5 ms 151 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 RECV 098 The transmission delay for the RECV 098 instruction can be calculated using the equation illustrated in the following diagram RECV 098 executed in user program CPU Bus Unit CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node Service Cycle local node 2 i CPU Bus Unit CPU Bus Unit iy Service processing time Y service processing time local node i Y local node 2 Transmission Reception CPU data set Y ina ti ing ti iy processing time processing time command proce
14. es y A Command Results storage area code Command Block UDP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Response code Response Block Results Storage Format 173 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O UDP Socket Number The UDP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command Results Storage Area The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first Command byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Response Codes Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible 1001 1002 1100 1101 1103 Command too large Command too small UDP socket number is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area Specified socket is not open High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction
15. 0006 ENXIO No such device or address 0009 EBADF Bad file number incorrect socket specification 000D EACCES Permission denied Check the IP address of the remote node and Broadcast address specified for try to reconnect remote IP address for active TCP open 000E EFAULT Bad address copy failed between Close the local socket and try reopening it kernel and user area 0016 EINVAL Invalid argument socket library argument error 0018 EMFILE Too many open files More than 32 sockets 0020 EPIPE Broken pipe remote node closed Close the local socket socket EPROTONO Protocol not supported protocol Close the local socket and try reopening it SUPPORT other than UDP TCP or RAW speci fied 003D EPROTOTYPE Protocol wrong type for socket 003E ENOBUFS No buffer space available There is too much load traffic on the Ethernet Unit Check your user applications 231 Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 5 Response UNIX error Description Probable remedy code message 003F EISCONN Socket is already connected con Close the local socket and try reopening it nection attempted to open socket 0040 ENOTCONN Socket is not connected send attempted to closed socket 0041 EALREADY Operation already in progress con nection attempted to existing non block connection 0042 EMSGSIZE Message too long 0043 EDESTADDRREQ Destination address required desti Close the local socket and try reopening it nation add
16. 1 PLC 10 Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help T C51H CPUGTH des Inner Board 7 00 1500 CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Ethernet Unit 1 01 0000 Empty Slot A 02 0000 Empty Slot 03 0000 Empty Slot FI 04 0000 Empty Slot 05 0000 Empty Slot 06 0000 Empty Slot Fl 07 0000 Empty Slot F o8 0000 Empty Slot 09 0000 Empty Slot 2 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 e 0000 Rack 03 es 0000 Rack 04 e 0000 Rack 05 5 rnonn nm i or 4 CSLH CPU67H Offline 4 Move the cursor to the Ethernet Unit and right click Select Unit Setup from the popup menu to display the window for making the Ethernet Unit Setup The default settings are shown below CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All 438650 f Default 9600 f Default 9600 0 min 0 default 1120 f ano0 4 2850 C User defined User defined P Addes Performance of socket service High Speed 0 0 0 0 Conversion Baud Rate f Auto dynamic e Auto C Auto Static C 10BASE T 4 0 0 0 f Combined C Destination IF is Not changed dynamically FINS UDP Option sub net Mask Destination IP is changed dynamically FT Enable CIDR IP address table ETN11 compatible mode FTP IP Address Table IF Router Table Login MI Password Port N
17. 135 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Mode number E o Userdefimed Po Ippe name P FV IF address jo jo p jo TCP setting TCP port number la keep alive Lancel E e Node address Set the remote FINS node address e P address Set the remote IP address e Destination port number Set the FINS TCP port number for the remote node Normally the PLC s default setting of 9600 should be specified e Keep alive setting Sets the keep alive function Normally this should be selected 3 Starting FinsGateway ETN UNIT Service Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway Setup Window and then click the Start Button m System Configuration Example 3 Connecting the CX Programmer Online Using the FINS TCP Method In this example an online connection is made by FINS TCP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS TCP method CX Programmer CX Integrator Node number 1 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Ethernet Unit node number 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 FinsGateWay Version 2003 Ethernet port qua Target PLC Ethernet Network number none FINS TCP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting Network Tab FIN
18. 150 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU execution mode Processing time considerations Normal Mode Set time for peripheral servicing Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with synchro nous memory access Parallel processing with asynchro 1 ms max nous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Transmission Processing Time Number of words sent x 0 002 0 550 ms Transmission Delay The transmission delay time will be as given below depending on the baud rate set for the Ethernet Unit There may be additional delays depending on devices such as hubs in the network configuration Delay time 100Base TX Number of words sent x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Number of words sent x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Reception Processing Time Number of words sent x 0 003 0 704 ms CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing Processing time considerations mode settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral ser Ethernet Unit is given Time slice instruction execution vicing priority time Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with CPU Unit cycle time synchronous memo
19. 7 3 11 UDP SEND REQUEST Command Block rep ID TT y K K yI AMA Ooo oe Command code Socket option Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command UDP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Destination IP Address Command Destination UDP Port Number Command Number of Bytes Sent Command Results Storage Area Send Data Command Response Codes 172 UDP socket number Requests that data be received by a UDP socket Results storage area Destination IP address Destination Number of Send data UDP bytes sent port number Command Response code code Bale AI Response Number of code bytes sent The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O The UDP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the result of the command execution is stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified The IP address of the node to which data is being sent is specified in hexa decimal The UDP port number of the node to which data is being sent The number of bytes in the data sent by this command Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified or up to 1 472 bytes can be s
20. E L l Communications Firewall l l l l l l Intranet Firewall Communications in intranet Conditions for Using Communications Applications 1 2 3 1 112 l Global address l l i l A Private address address Private address l l l l l l l l Ethernet Ej El l l l l l l l l l l l l l sl a PLC lal cl Ethernet Unit Global address Not output to Internet Global address v required A Not output to Internet Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the follow ing conditions FINS Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer with a FINS application including a CX Programmer can connect online and communicate over the Inter net with an Ethernet Unit that has a global address e FINS TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service method FINS TCP is more reliable than FINS UDP in terms of communications errors involving IP routers e The IP address table method is used as the Ethernet Unit s IP address conversion method e The TCP port number to be used for FINS TCP cannot be used if prohib ited by a firewall in the communications path Transferring Files e Files can be transferred over the Internet between a device such as a per sonal computer i e an FTP client and a PLC with an Ethernet Unit that has a global address e The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be
21. Ethernet Unit node number 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 du Target PLC1 Ethernet port Ethernet Network address None FINS UDP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting PLC name Network classification Network Tab FINS transmission source address 0 Response monitor time Driver Tab Workstation node address Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 192 168 250 2 Ethernet Unit IP eh 9600 128 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Broadcast All ones 4 3BSD FINS UDP port Default 9600 IP address 0 0 0 0 Use default IP address Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Baud rate Automatic detection IP router table Noe Example Inputs to the CX Programmer s Setup Window Example Change PLC Settings xi Device Name NewPLC1 Device Type CS1G 016 Settings Comment Cancel 129 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Example Network Settings Network Tab Network Settings Ethernet x Network Driver FINS Source Address Network jo E Hade fo Unit jo FINS Destination 4ddress Network jo 5 Node E 4 Unit jo Frame Length Response Timeout 3 2000 2 Host Link Unit Humber Hetwok Operating Level fo fe Hi C H Cancel Help Note When
22. Input CIO 1200 00 remains ON from the start of SEND 090 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word D00000 00 OA Number of send words 10 DO0001 00 02 Destination network number 2 DO0002 04 OO Destination node number 4 Destination unit address O Doo003 07 05 Response required Communications port No used 7 i Number of retries 5 D00004 00 64 Response monitor time 10 s Send Data Creation Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is stored from D00010 onwards Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2 node number 4 unit address O the PLC Reset Input Creation Send Error Display 147 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Continued from previous page Execution condition See note 0000 01 A202 07 1200 00 H KEEP 120002 R 1200 03 1200 02 MOV 21 0010 D00005 MOV 21 0003 D00006 2000 D00007 MOV 21 MOV 21 MOV 21 g g O O olo olo oyo OTN oyo olo o po Ol RECV 98 z o ln gt o lo J a o lo lo da o lo 1200 02 A202 07 See note HA DIFU 13 1200 02 A219 07 Nh Q Oo Oo wm 1200 02 1200 03 A219 07 Note 1 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and SEND 090 is not being executed the trans mission execution program will start when execution condition ClO 00
23. NO PO DO Oojo NO PO PO j O B O O O oO O MIOJ Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code 0000 Description Normal 7 3 13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST Requests processing to open a TCP socket The socket will wait to be con nected to another node Command Block y Command Results storage area Local Timeout Remote IP address Remote TCP code TCP port value port number TCP socket number number Socket option Command Response code code Response Block 174 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command Note TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local TCP Port Number Command HHH Response Remote IP address Remote code port number The socket option is specified in one byte Bit 7 _ 1 0 Keep alive specification 0 Keep alive disabled 1 Keep alive enabled Linger specification 0 TCP connection will be closed by sending FIN data to manage closing 1 TCP connection will be closed immediately by sending RST data 1 Starting with unit version 1 5 it is possible to specify the linger option 2 If the linger option is not specified and a TCP connection is closed FIN data will be sent and then approximately 1 minute will be used to confirm the transmission and perform other closing management with the remote node Therefore it may not be possible to immediately use TCP socke
24. Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 1 6 Nomenclature and Functions This section describes Ethernet Unit component names settings and LED indicators 1 6 1 Component Names CS series Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 100Base TX Indicators Display the operating status of the Unit Unit Number Switch Used to set the Ethernet Unit s unit number in one digit hexadecimal Node Address Switches Used to set the Ethernet Unit s FINS node number in two digits hexadecimal 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet Connector Used to connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable Each communications device connected to the Ethernet network is allocated a unique Ethernet address For the Ethernet Unit this Ethernet address is shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12 digit hexadecimal number omron CS1W ETN21 ETHERNET UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Ooo00o00o000o005 Ethernet Address Ethernet address 12 digits Note The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command CON TROLLER DATA READ For details refer to 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ on page 162 23 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 CJ series Ethernet Units CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Front e Unit Version 1 5 or Later Unit Version 1 4 or Earlier Slider A For mounting to other Units Indicators ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LINK ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LINK E o 0O o o Displ
25. e A timeout occurs during communications with the server a Tet Notused e e e S SNTP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during SNTP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when SNTP server operation is normal SMTP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during SMTP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server e The verification time from the server has expired when POP before SMTP is set OFF when SMTP server operation is normal 13 POP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during POP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A server verification error user name or password occurs e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when use of the POP server is normal Address disagreement ON Unit ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic genera tion but the local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree OFF under all other circumstances EEPROM error ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal 8 3 Error Log The Ethernet Unit provides an error log that records errors that have occurred during Ethernet Unit operation The contents of the error log can be read
26. 7 3 19 FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST Command Block Requests a remote node change for the FINS TCP connection The default destination IP address in a connection in which the Ethernet Unit is used as a Client is the destination IP address set under the FINS TCP Tab in the Unit Setup By sending this command to the Ethernet Unit the destina tion IP address for the specified connection can be changed to another IP address Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as FINS TCP clients in the Unit Setup Command FINS TCP Remote IP Remote TCP code connection No address port number 185 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Block alo Command Response code code Parameters FINS TCP Connection No Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which Command the change is to be made Remote IP Address Specifies the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Command Remote Port Number Specifies the remote TCP port number must be non zero with this com Command mand Response Codes 0105 Node address setting error pee AP 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small 1100 Connection number not set from 1 to 16 Remote IP address set to O Remote TCP port number set to O Connection already established with specified remote node Specified connection number not set as FINS TCP client in Unit Setup Remote node change
27. CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 7 3 10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST Requests that data be sent from a UDP socket es Command Block Command Results storage area Number Timeout code UDP socket number of reception value bytes Socket option Command Response code code Response Block Results Storage Format Response Source IP address Source UDP Number of Received data code port number reception bytes Parameters Socket Option Command _ The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O UDP Socket Number The UDP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command 170 Command Response Reference Results Storage Area Command Number of Reception Bytes Command Results Storage Area Timeout Value Command Source IP Address Results Storage Area Source UDP Port Number Results Storage Area Received Data Results Storage Area Precautions Response Codes Section 7 3 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The maximum number of bytes of da
28. Day Hour Year Month Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the num ber of records parameter all records stored in the error log at the time the command is executed will be returned and the command executed will end normally 0000 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small 1103 Beginning record number is out of range 110C The number of read records is 0 7 3 8 ERROR LOG CLEAR Command Block Response Block Response Codes 168 Clears the number of records stored in the Ethernet Unit error log 21 03 Command code Command Response code code 0000 1001 Command too large Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 9 UDP OPEN REQUEST Command Block Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command UDP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local UDP Port Number Command Response Codes Requests processing to open a socket y Results storage area Local UDP port number Command code UDP socket number Socket option Command Response code code uN Results storage response code The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O The UDP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first b
29. Mail Log Read Backup e MailLogClear Mail Log Clear e PARAMBackup Parameter Area e Test Mail Test Backup e FinsSend FINS Command e OMWrite I O Memory Write Send e OMRead I O Memory Read To use the mail receive function there must be a separate POP3 server on the network Aside from the IP address the host name used for DNS service can be specified for the POP3 server Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Reference a Mail software A Sending e mail C a SNTP server Sending e mail Internet J m Intranet a Irewa A Se a o e o Server room i Office floor i I a E f DNS server l lt Mail software 1 l ES Al POP3 server Q bi l Des SMTP server i i i I Ethernet Ethernet aL x E erne E erne i i Production line 2 Writing command E File attachment enabled Writing command E ATA File attachment enabled E O r BUNKE Receiving e mail at the PLC i l l i l a C l i l l l l LA A A A A A A A A A A A a ee ee ee ae a a a SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Exchanging Large Files between a Personal Computer and PLC Operation Reference Use the FTP server function The FTP server function makes it possible to log in to the Ethernet Unit from a computer FTP client as required and to specify folders a
30. Reception Problems Reception Problems occurred Is reception processing finishing Is the remote node not processing to send data N Adjust the remote node to process send data Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS There may be noise affecting the network Increase the number of retries or take Y p measures against noise as described in 2 4 Network Installation Have any reception errors occurred Read memory status using the FINS command READ MEMORY STATUS There may be too much load on the Ethernet Y Unit If the memory exhaustion records show counts UDP data may be corrupted Check your applications Is the network memory being used more than 80 Read protocol status using the FINS command READ PROTOCOL STATUS Are any of the first three items in the tatus being counted y The UDP protocol of the remote node may not be compatible with that of the Ethernet Unit Use another communications service Check the remote node for transmission problems using the next procedure If nothing is uncovered go to Network Return to the procedure Connection Problems for general problems 216 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Transmission Problems Transmission Problems occurred Is send processing not finishing Y Return to the procedure for general problems Read protocol
31. Settings Menu 1 TP address and Protocols o System e ETE a ERE When login is successful the following setting window will be displayed 4 Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer DER Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help n Q Back J E a 2 yp Search y lo Favorites 4 amp a 33 Address http 192 168 250 1 0 vw Eso Llink OMRON Ethernet unit System Format Settings Parameter Value TP address 0 0 0 0 Menu Net mask 0 0 0 0 J enable CIDR 1 IP address and Protocols FINS UDP Port 0 Use Input Port No Default 9600 o System o FTP FINS TCP Port 0 C Use Input Port No Default 9600 o DNS px EATE eS ate Auto Dynamic Auto Static O Manual o al Address conversion mode al o o SNTP Destination IP address is changed dynamically o HTTP FINS UDP option O Destination IP address is Not changed dynamically IP addressfrouter table OETN11 compatible mode o IP address table Broad cast option Oall 1 4 3BSD O all 0 4 2BSD TP router tabl OO E Baud Rate Auto O 10BASE T o Connection 1 8 TCP IP keep alive 0 min 0 default 120 o Connection 9 16 7 Send Mail Performance of socket service High Speed o Mail address FINS TCP Protected o Send Mail SMTP Server O Host name IP address Receive Mail ee POP Server Host name IP address SNTP Server Host name IP address E Done MD Internet Select HTTP from the menu to display the HTTP setting items The following wi
32. Socket interface Ethernet Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit 19 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 3 FTP Server Function The Ethernet Unit has a built in FTP server so other computers on the Ether net can read or write individual files on a Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit or in EM File Memory This allows files to be exchanged between the host computer and the PLC with the host computer functioning as an FTP client and the PLC as an FTP server Host computer FTP client Memory Card or EM File Memory PLC to host computer File data Memory Card or EM File Memory Memory Card or EM File Memory 1 5 4 Mail Send Function 20 Note This function automatically sends data in the CPU Unit s I O memory or a file on a Memory Card as an e mail attachment from the Ethernet Unit to speci fied e mail addresses when a pre specified PLC condition is met User cre ated data in ASCII error log data and status data in the CPU Unit can all be sent as text E mail can be sent over the Internet and not just within the intranet SMTP server CPU Unit The e mail can be sent on any of the following types of timing When the Mail Send Switch turns ON When the value of a specified word meets a condition When the value of a specified bit meets a condition When an error is recorded in the Ethernet Unit s error log When the CPU Unit s operating mode is changed At regular intervals
33. Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 FINS Communications Problems occurred Refer to 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes and remove any causes of the problem discovered there before proceeding with this procedure y Make sure that the FINS network address is not set to 0 for the Ethernet Unit and check the network address node number and unit address Is the control data for the instruction set incorrectly Is a CMND 194 instruction being addressed to the local node e g for socket services Are different UDP port numbers set for FINS communications for both Set the same port number for both nodes the local node and the Y IP routing must be used if the net ID of the IP address of the Kre the local and remota Is the IP address local node and remote node Set the IP address of the remote nodes both on the same N Y AL node in the local IP address table Note Use of the IP address of the remote node missing from network e do they have the the IP address table ame network number in thei IP addresses table must be set in the mode settings for the IP address table to be effective Note The automatic generation setting cannot be used alone Set the network number of the remote node in the IP router table Is the IP address of the remote node missing
34. another file memory in the same sys tem 22 08 FILENAME CHANGE Changes a file name 22 OA MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the I O memory area and the file memory 22 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the parameter area and the file memory 22 OC PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the UM User Memory area and the file memory CREATE DELETE DIRECTORY Creates or deletes a directory Debugging 23 01 FORCED SET RESET Force sets or force resets bits or releases force set status 23 02 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Cancels all bits that have been force set or force reset 6 6 4 Writing Programs Programs incorporating the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions CS CJ series CPU Units have eight communications ports Only one instruction can be executed at any given port at one time however so the program must not overlap the use of any of the ports A program example is provided below Communications port Ethernet Unit CPU Unit lt There are eight communications ports so up to eight communications instructions can be executed at a time The number of messages that can be sent or received with a single CPU Bus Unit service though is not more than two each for the CPU Unit to the Ethernet Unit and for t
35. nections Current consumption Unit 380 mA max at 5 V DC Dimensions ssx 190 x 104 mm WxHxD Other general specifications Conform to general specifications for the SYSMAC CS Series CJ series Ethernet Unit IEA DO IN 77 TN specifica Transmission media Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Categories 5 5e Categories 3 4 5 5e Shielded twisted pair STP cable Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Categories 100 Q at 3 4 5 5e 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade con No restrictions if switching hubs are used nections Dimensions 8906 WHO 14 Section 1 4 Specifications 1 4 2 Dimensions CS1W ETN21 NO ea 6 Unit mm CJ1W ETN21 Back Front e Unit Version 1 5 or Later e Unit Version 1 4 or Earlier J lt 31 gt A gt ETN21 ETN21 AUN ERC SD RD LIN RUN ERC SD RD LINK 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 00M ERH TCP FTP HOST ASB UNIT MEA UNIT SO No See No ES KADY y NODE SA NODE Soe Sg No SE No ORY x16 IES x16 CRY x16 SUN SOS SRT 16 o O 100BASE TX 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE T o N A Unit mm 15 Specifications Section 1 4 1 4 3 Software Configuration The software supported by the Ethernet Unit runs in the layers shown in
36. 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Remote node number M send source 00 to FE Hex O to 254 The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 140 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CMND 490 The CMND 490 instruction sends n bytes of command data starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the node at node address N the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Destination node number N Command Interpretation Response oro 490 S Beginning command storage word D Beginning response storage word C First word of control data below 15 0 loo 7 SS malal Number of bytes of command data n 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes Number of bytes of response data m 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 b
37. 2 FINS TCP CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters FJ Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt FINS TCEP Connection Setting Server Client Destination Auto allocat keep alive 1 e 235 z FINS TCP Serer nate __ Edt 3 FINS TCP Server nate 241 Valid 4 FINS TCP Server nine 242 Valid 5 FINS TCF Server e 243 Valid B FINS TEP Server nate 244 Valid T FINS TCF Server nine 245 Valid a FINS TCP Server net 246 Valid J FINS TCF Server meine 247 Valid 10 FINS TCP Server net 248 Valid 11 FINS TEP Server nite 249 Valid 12 FINS TCP Server none 250 Valid 13 FINS TCP Server e 25 Valid 14 FINS TCP Server nine 252 Valid 15 FINS TCP Server nee 253 Valid 16 FINS TCP Server meine 254 Valid Protect by IP Address FINS TCP server only Transient pc _TrensfetPCto Unit Compare ssw estar SetDefauts Cancel FINS TCP Connection Setting FINS TEP Connection Mo 1 FINS TCP Server Client le Server C Client Destination IP Address W Auto allocated FINS node a 235 W keep alive Cancel FINS TCP Connection Setup tem AT TT Shows the connection number This is a network API used when TCP is used for the FINS communica tions service It corresponds to a socket in the socket services Up to 16 can be used at a time and they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16 The Ethernet Unit can thus simultaneously exec
38. 4 gt Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All 4 35650 f Default 9600 f Default 9600 0 min 0 default 11207 C AllO 4 2650 C User defined C User defined IP Address ic of socket service High Speed 10 3 65 1 Conversion Baud Rate paa f Auto dynamic e Auto e al l ub net M s Ee C 10BASE T i Destination IF is changed dynamically 0 0 0 0 C Combined C Destination IP is Not changed dynamically Enable CIDR C IF address table C ETN11 compatible mode FTP IP Address T able IP Router Table Login Password Port Ho o 0 Default 21 J LirensfefUrittoPG _TrensfetPCto Unity Compare SotSw estar Set Defaute Cancel E Window Display in ETN11 Mode CJ1W ETNZ1 ETN11Mode Edit Parameters x Setting Mail Setup Broadcast FINS UDP Part f Alld 43850 Default 9600 C AND 4 2650 C User defined IP Address 10 3 65 1 C onversion Sub net Mask fe Auto dynamic Auto Static 0 0 0 0 Combined C IF address table FTP IF Address Table IP Router Table Login fo Password mw A Ins Del Transter Unit to PE Transfer PE to Unit Compare Soo Restart Set Defaults Cancel E Checking by Reading Words Allocated in the CIO Area 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 TIT TITITTTIITILI LI System Setting Format 56 Converting from Previous Models Changing the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format 11 10 09 08 Sect
39. 5 Application Precautions 44 4 04 04 odes iad ee iba donas bie xxiii 6 Conformance to EC Directives sca oe As XXV 6 1 Applicable Dit CHESS da ada XXV 6 2 Concepisss vcd picada tae s sa e ad eo Feds XXV Xx Intended Audience 1 2 3 xxii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read
40. 6 7 nodes traffic through the Ethernet Unit e g socket servicing FTP server communications etc and the system configuration Example Calculations The following example shows calculations for receiving 256 words between two PLC nodes using RECV 098 Calculations are shown in the following table Conditions Local node CPU cycle time 10 ms Local node CPU processing mode Normal Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Remote node CPU cycle time 15 ms Remote node CPU processing mode Normal Remote node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Baud rate 100Base TX tem o O Calculations CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 1 CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 1 Transmission processing time command 0 550 ms 0 5 ms Reception processing time command 0 704 ms 0 7 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Transmission processing time response 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay response 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms ane i Reception processing time response 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 2 CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 1 5 10 0 4 40 6 ms 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications When applications are constructed using FINS communications services communications errors from multiple resp
41. 9600 Default 9600 0 min 0 default 120 C AND 4 2650 C User defined C User defined Edos Performance of socket service O 0 0 o High Speed i i Conversion Baud Aate Auto dynamic O auia FINS UDP optin Sub net Mask S uoki O EET C Destination Pis changed dynamically 0 0 0 0 C Combined f Destination IF is Not changed dynamicall el Enable CIDF IP address table C ETN11 compatible mode FTF IF Address Table IP Router Table Login Password Port Ho E 0 Default 21 Te Dei Ing Del ranstedlinitioPC _TransfetPCto Uri Compare _ Sotsw estar SetDefauts Cancel For Ethernet Unit with unit version 1 4 or later operating specifications can be made compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for all methods auto matic generation dynamic I O address table or combined Dynamic changes however are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11 compatible mode While in ETN11 compatible mode the following operations will be performed the same as they are for the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for FINS UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the local FINS UDP port number default 9600 set in the Unit Setup Tab Page e f the command data is for the Ethernet Unit a FINS response will be sent to the source UDP port number e If the command data is for any other Unit such as the CPU Unit a FINS response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS UDP port number Th
42. A server verification error user name or password occurs e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when use of the POP server is normal Address disagreement ON Unit ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic genera tion but the local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree OFF under all other circumstances EEPROM error ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal Socket Service Request When a socket service request is executed by control bit manipulation it is the Switches 1 to 8 CPU Unit following bits that are manipulated For details refer to Operation Manual to Ethernet Unit Construction of Applications SECTION 6 15 14 13 12 411 10 09 08 07 066 05 04 03 02 401 00 n 19 to n 22 UDP Open Request Switch TCP Passive Open Request Switch TCP Active Open Request Switch Send Request Switch Receive Request Switch Close Request Switch CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 a Manipulated Unit operation Reference by UDP Open Request ON User UDP socket opened when switch is turned Operation Man Switch ON ual Construc tion of Applications SECTION 6 Unit Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been completed i e when a connection has been made TCP Passive Open User Passive TCP socket opened when switch is Request Switch turned ON Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been com
43. About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units 100Base TX and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the Ethernet Unit Be sure to read the precautions provided in the fol lowing section Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units 100Base TX Section 1 introduces the features describes the system configuration and Unit parts and provides Unit specifications Section 2 explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation Section 3 provides information for setting communications using CX Programmer Section 4 describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses Section 6 provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands Section 7 describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that are returned by the Ethernet Unit Section 8 describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that some times occur with Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications Appendices provide information on Ethernet network parameters the buffer configuration TCP statu
44. Applica Unit Turned OFF by Unit after sockets tions SECTION 6 are closed Mail Send Switch ON User User mail is sent when this bit turns Operation Manual Con ON struction of Applica OFF Unit Turned OFF by Unit after user mail 078 SECTION 2 has been sent 04 Automatic Clock ON User The automatic clock adjustment is Operation Manual Con Adjustment Switch executed when this bit turns ON struction of Applica OFF Unit Turned OFF by Unit after automatic 078 SECTION 5 clock adjustment has been com pleted 0510 15 ms f OS Socket Force close Switch Bit 02 All UDP and TCP sockets used for socket services can be force closed by turning ON this switch This can be used for operations such as error process ing Be careful not to force close sockets during communications or an error will occur After all sockets have been force closed the Ethernet Unit will turn the switch OFF again Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Ports used exclusively by the Ethernet Unit will not be closed Mail Send Switch Bit 03 User mail can be sent by turning ON this switch The contents of the user mail are set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup After the user mail has been sent the Ethernet Unit will turn this switch OFF again Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is automati cally turned OFF by the Unit Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch Bit
45. Ethernet Unit PLC In the FINS communications service both an IP address for IP the Internet layer and a FINS node address for FINS the application layer are used for the remote device Also 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP or TCP port number i e the transport layer for identifying the application layer i e the FINS communications service Another number can be set for the FINS UDP port from the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP TCP port numbers refer to 5 2 P Addresses in FINS Communications Application Layer Node Number UDP CP Transport Layer UDP Port No TCP Port No Internet Layer IP Address Physical Layer Ethernet Address UN The FINS communications service is a communications method based on UDP IP and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet related products In this manual it is called the FINS UDP method In addition to supporting the FINS UDP method the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 support FINS com munications using TCP IP In this manual this is called the FINS TCP method 6 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods It is recommended that FINS UDP and FINS TCP be used as follows e When remote devices do not support the FINS TCP method Use the FINS UDP method for FINS communications with those devices 116 Overview of FINS Communications Section 6 1 e When FINS nodes are connected on the same Etherne
46. FINS TCP Tab No 9 to 16 IP address router table IP address table IP router table FINS TCP Connection 1 8 FINS TCP server client IP Address Auto allocated FINS node keep alive Connection 9 16 Send Mail Mail address Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Mail address 1 Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Mail address 2 Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Trigger No Mail address 1 Mail address 2 Send Mail Trigger No Trigger option Not Use Software switch Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Trigger No Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Send mail upon trigger Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Software switch Word value change Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Word value change Bit value change Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Bit value change ETN condition change Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab ETN condition at error storage Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab CPU condition Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Periodic timer Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Mail address Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Interval time CPU condition change Periodic timer Mail address Interval time Include data Send user data Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Send user data Area Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab User defined mail address Send Error Log information Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Send Error Log informat Send Status in
47. FINS response returned Note Section 5 2 IP address method Automatic generation method dynamic When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a FINS command this is sent to the IP address in the internal table Prohibiting Dynamically Changing Remote IP Addresses For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later methods used to dynamically change remote IP addresses automatic generation IP address table or com bined mixed method can be prohibited protected against Use the CX Pro grammer unit setting function version 5 0 and higher or Web function setting window to make this setting When dynamically changing remote destination IP addresses is prohibited the internal table for each method is maintained in the state when the power was turned ON or restarted Therefore protection can be provided against access using FINS UDP from personal computers or other devices that have dynamically changing IP addresses To prohibit protect from dynamic changes deselect the Change Dynamically option in the Setup Tab of the Unit Setup 101 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Using the ETN11 compatible Mode 102 1 2 3 Note CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters FI Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adjustme 4 Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All 43850 Default
48. FTP server on standby FTP status OFF Lit FTP server operating FTP status ON CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Accessing Memory Sending Mail Bit 01 This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to create a file to be attached using the mail send function and it turns OFF when the file has been created ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail receive function Accessing Memory Receiving Mail Bit 02 This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail receive function and it turns OFF after the file has been stored System Setup Format Bits 08 to 11 These bits show the format classification in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area 11 10 09 08 o fo fo 0 Emmm o o o 1 Emam Reserve Error Status Ethernet Unit The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the to CPU Unit following diagram 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 wf IT AAA TTT T EE Bit 02 IP address setting error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error E E IL Unit operation vons a e o ooo gt a setting error Unit ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP address e All bi
49. Global Addresses EA aed kare 108 SECTION 6 FINS Communicati0DS ooooooooooooooooooooooo o 115 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications o 116 6 22 BINSUDP Metodo NA is 118 6 3 BINS CP IMenod tia eiii 120 6 4 Greats Route Tables ios AA ASAS we eG eS Sieh 124 6 5 Usine TINS Applications A St wh S ee he ee eh ee eae eee 128 6 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 0 0 eee eens 137 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 00 00 cece eee eens 155 SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units 157 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 0 0 0 0 0 cence nent ees 158 7 2 SOCKELADPMCAUONS rider io raid ended ae eae Sk 159 7 3 Commiand Response Reference sidad rd 161 SECTION 8 Troubleshooting 0 0 iii ias 203 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators 44 44 as IA A di 204 0 2 ETOCS aUn a a AS SS a los 205 De EMOL raid ee ode recia ina oe 206 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures 000 iS A A ewe ea es 213 8 5 Results Storage Area Response Codes o oo o oooooooo eens 231 TABLE OF CONTENTS Appendices As Ethernet Network Parameters sisdisrre d iS AS e AAA h 235 B Buiter ConmouravOn sa AS EA o 237 C TCP Status rans Ons a dida eat minado ba dodo loncha 239 DD ASCHC Haa sit a e a e WS EA Sa sida 241 Er Niaimtenance serra Td da 243 EY InSpeciOns ruca E A A dos 245 G Ethernet Unit Web Funcom rita ddr darle 247 A O Revisi n HIStory asadas 201
50. Mail Address Tab 51 69 Mail password field 68 mail receive function 6 9 21 mail send function 5 20 Mail Send Switch 5 20 mail triggers 5 MailLogClear command 6 73 MailLogRead command 6 73 main response code 158 See also MRES maintenance 243 media access method CJ series 14 CS series 14 memory areas See also data areas Memory Card 7 MEMORY STATUS READ 196 mode settings reading from Unit 162 modulation method CJ series 14 CS series 14 mounting Racks 33 MRES 159 N Network Tab 128 133 networks network memory 196 238 No field 64 node addresses manipulating rotary switches 58 setting 31 32 Node Number Switches 23 noise xxiii Contact Output Units 37 O OBJ extension 73 online editing xxii Opening Flag 80 operating environment precautions XXxiii P PARAMBackup command 6 73 Password field 63 PCMR 260 instruction 144 PING 11 52 184 Index application examples 53 echo test 52 POP server 22 POP Tab 51 68 POP3 communications 16 POP3 server 6 Port No field 63 66 68 74 port numbers UDP port reading from Unit 162 power supply xxiii precautions xxiv precautions XXI applications xxiii Contact Output Units 37 general xxii inspections 245 installation 33 34 operating environment xxiii power supply xxiv replacing Units 243 safety xxii wiring 38 Programming Console 39 Programming Devices connec
51. Network Service A protocol that sends messages between PLCs on any of various OMRON FA networks To ensure that transmitted messages arrive at the destination node it is necessary to program special measures such as retry process ing into the user s applications FTP File Transfer Protocol Transfers data files SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A communications protocol for sending e mail by TCP IP POPS Post Office Protocol Ver 3 0 A communications protocol for receiving e mail by TCP IP SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol A communications protocol for automatic clock adjustment by UDP IP DNS Domain Name System A communications protocol for determining IP address names according to UDP IP and TCP IP Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 Overview of Communications Functions 1 5 1 FINS Communications Service Basic Functions FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on the same Ethernet network by executing SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions in the ladder diagram program This enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations Ethernet IP upp or TcP FINS UDP or TCP see ewe eee eee eee eee CS CJ series CPU Unit Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit User program SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruc
52. Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port O Communications Port A219 it 7 Port 7 0 Normal completion Port 6 1 Abnormal completion Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Note With CS CJ series PLCs communications ports O to 7 are also used for exe cuting the PCMR 260 PROTOCOL MACRO instruction so these flags are used in common for SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 and PCMR 260 While PCMR 260 is being executed SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 cannot be executed at the same communications port 144 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Communications Port Completion Codes The status of a SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruction after execution is reflected as a communications port completion code in one word two bytes of data as shown in the following table The value is 0000 during instruction execution The recorded status is saved until execution of the next instruction Contents A203 Communications Port 0 Completion Code A204 Communications Port 1 Completion Code A205 Communications Port 2 Completion Code A206 Communications Port 3 Completion Code A207 Communications Port 4 Completion Code A208 Communications Port 5 Completion Code A209 Communications Port 6 Completion Code A210 Communications Port 7 Completion Code The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as those for FINS commands and responses When CMND 490 is used how ever even
53. Port No Unit Setup window POP Tab Port No Mail account Unit Setup window POP Tab Account Name Mail password Unit Setup window POP Tab Mail password Server access interval time Unit Setup window POP Tab Server access interval time SNTP Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab P Address or Host name Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Port No Auto Adjust Time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Auto Adjust Time Adjust Time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Adjust Time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Retry timer Option Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Get the time information from the SNTP Get the time info from the SNTP server server HTTP Unit Setup window HTTP Tab WEB Password Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Password WEB Password Confirm None for confirmation of Web password Port No Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Port No Option Use Web Function Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Use Web Function Unit Setup window Setup Tab Unit Setup window Setup Tab P Address Table Unit Setup window Setup Tab P Router Table Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab No 1 to 8 Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab FINS TCP Mode Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab P Address Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Auto allocated FINS node Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab keep alive Unit Setup window
54. Program mer s Unit Setup e FINS node address Set the number using the NODE NO rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node including Ethernet Units The IP address must be paired with the FINS node address 1 to 254 by one of the following methods Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Static Set the relation between the IP address and the FINS node address for the Ethernet Unit according to the following equation If the setting does not con form to this equation a setting error will be generated and the ERH indicator will flash FINS node address IP address host number IP Address Table Method and Combined Method With these methods the IP address and the FINS node address for the Ether net Unit have no particular relationship Set both the FINS node address and the IP address so that they are not duplicated in the network When the Ethernet Unit sends a FINS message it must determine the remote node s IP address UDP port number and TCP port number The relation ships between all addresses such as remote FINS node addresses and IP addresses are managed by an internal table at the Ethernet Unit Remote FINS node Remote IP address Connection Remote port address Example number Example 192 168 2501 UDP 9600 Ce FUNES EU 192 168 250 254 UDP When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted the internal table is gener ated automatical
55. Response code Description 0000 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small 7 3 25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ Reads the Ethernet Unit protocol status Command Block 27 62 Command code Response Block Command Response IP status ICMP status TCP status UDP status code code Parameters IP Status Response Twelve types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 23 1 Total number of IP packets received 2 The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in the packet header 3 The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header 4 The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP header data could not be stored in the first short buffer See note when an attempt was made to store the packet Refer to 7 3 26 MEMORY STA TUS READ and Appendix B Buffer Configuration 5 The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons e The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the smallest size of the IP header e The size of the first short buffer See note was smaller than the IP header length value in the IP header when storing the packet 192 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 6 The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was larger than th
56. Setup Area format is in ETN21 mode from the beginning Checking the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format Checking with the CX Programmer s Software Switch Monitor Status Tab Page CJ1W ETN21 ETMN1 1Mode SoftSW File Options General Status Error Status TCP Socket Connection Status FINS TCP Connection Status Ma 4 FTP Server Status Power Supply Memory Send Mail Unit Control Switch On standby EJ not supplied Not Accessing Start to post mail Force closure Susten Eoma Link Status Memory Receive Mail AA CNS Not established Not Accessing UWDPYTCP Socket Status e Tia ee o a eo Ices Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Not open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Mot open Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed None 55 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 Checking with the CX Programmer s Unit Setup Window E Window Display in ETN21 Mode CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters FJ Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme
57. Setup is supported by Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later 2 Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX Programmer to be included in version 5 0 and higher or using the Web function refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 75 HTTP Section 3 10 76 SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units 4 1 CIO Area Allocations ce ee eee eee 78 dez DM ATA ATOCAONS sana a A Ds ltda 86 ASS li Arca Data En SOR he hae de he ees 90 17 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 4 1 ClO Area Allocations The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation Beginning word n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Offset Bit 15 08 07 00 __ Data direction _ _ Related communications services n CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit Socket Services ee am Refer to Operation Manual n 1 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit construction of Applications n 3 n 4 Mail Function n 5 Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications n 6 SECTION 2 n 7 n 8 air na eek E n 9 Socket Services n 10 Refer to Operation Manual n 11 Construction of Applications SECTION 6 n 12 n 13 n 14 n 15 n 16 n 17 S
58. Ss a y Command Beginning Number code record of number records Command Response Maximum Number Number Error log data code code number of stored of of stored records records records Error log data The first record to be read The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and OOSF 0 to 63 decimal where 0000 is the oldest record The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 1 to 64 decimal in the command The response returns the actual number of records read The maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log Care is required as the error log differs according to the type of PC or CPU Bus Unit In an Ethernet Unit the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 64 decimal The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is returned 167 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Error Log Data Response Precautions Response Codes The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number is returned sequentially The total number of bytes in the error log is calculated as the number of records x 10 bytes record Each error log record thus com prises 10 bytes configured as follows 1st byte 10th byte Errorcode Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month information Error Code Detailed Information Details of the error stored in the record Refer to 8 3 7 Error Log Error Codes for details Minute Second
59. TCP IP ver sion of the FINS communications service It is possible to connect online to a PLC using the CX Programmer from a computer serving as a temporarily connected node or a permanent DHCP cli ent For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use lower versions of the CX Programmer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as personal computer middleware Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Connecting through multiple segments such as over the Internet Use FINS TCP CX Programmer Q LP gt FINS Internet ams Firewall i rr rec aaa f 7 Server room DNS se SMTP server SNTP server i A Z i CX Programmer i woo POP3 server i l ae i Ethernet Ethernet erne Fa erne i l L rouer Reference ee Connecting from a computer with a dynamic private IP address Intranet Use FINS TCP or FINS UDP Office floor 1 rver FINS Production line Connecting within the same segment CX Programmer Use FINS UDP Ze OZ FINS Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit PLC i d ee Ra CX Programmer ul gt ie l aN Using media with unreliable connections such as wireless LAN Use FINS TCP SECTION 6 FINS Communications Exchanging Data between OMRON PLCs using Ethernet Connecting within the Same Segment Connecting through Mu
60. The number of duplicated resend packets received 10 The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received 11 The number of out of range data packets received Always 0 12 The number of bytes in the out of range data packets received Always 0 13 The number of packets where the data was larger than the window 14 The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the window 15 The number of packets received after closing 16 The number of window probe packets received 17 The number of resent ACK packets received 18 The number of ACK packets received with no data set 19 The number of ACK packets received 20 The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowl edgements ACK 21 The number of window advertisement packets received Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 The number of packets discarded because the size of the first short buffer was smaller than the minimum size 28 of the IP header and UDP header when the packet was stored 2 The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the UDP header 3 The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP header was shorter than the UDP overall length in the UDP header All the above values are set to O if network operation stops due to incorrect settings in the s
61. addresses and IP addresses in the internal table are changed with each connection that is established Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command originated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected LoS FINS command sent IP address FINS command Ethernet Ethernet Unit FINS response i IP address FINS response FINS TCP server with fixed IP address Response sent back to changed IP address Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service DHCP service is a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all of the IP address in a network Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP server whenever the system is started Therefore at a personal computer using the DHCP service IP addresses may be different with each system startup DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as per sonal computers that are used for client applications Nodes used for server 105 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 applications such as mail servers are normally allocated fixed IP addresses Ethernet Units in PLC systems are also allocated fixed IP addresses Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Pe
62. another node Command Block Command Results storage area Local TCP Remote IP Remote TCP code t i TCP socket number port number address port number Socket option Command Response code code Response Block Results Storage Format HUESO Response Local port code number Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option is specified in one byte 177 Command Response Reference Note TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local TCP Port Number Command Results Storage Area Remote IP Address Command Remote Port Number Command 178 Section 7 3 Keep alive specification 0 Keep alive disabled 1 Keep alive enabled Linger specification 0 TCP connection will be closed by sending FIN data to manage closing 1 TCP connection will be closed immediately by sending RST data 1 Starting with unit version 1 5 it is possible to specify the linger option 2 If the linger option is not specified and a TCP connection is closed FIN data will be sent and then approximately 1 minute will be used to confirm the transmission and perform other closing management with the remote node Therefore it may not be possible to immediately use TCP sockets with the same port number 3 In contrast when the linger option is specified RST data will be sent when TCP is closed and closing will be performed immediately This en ables immediately opening TCP sockets with the same p
63. be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0 Received Data Results Stores the received data Storage Area 180 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small TCP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area The specified socket is receiving data No connection could be established to the specified socket High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 0042 see note Received ICMP data EMSGSIZE 0044 see note Received ICMP data ENOPROTOOPT 0045 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED 004B A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note Incorrect destination IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table Router inco
64. cannot 22 Status error operat ing mode dis perform operation specified socket number agreement 10 Socket not Socket status The specified socket is not open area open 11 Local node System load The internal buffers are full busy cannot send 26 FINS TCP not connected 30 Connection not establish Command data A connection is already estab lished with the specified remote node Unit settings and The specified connection num command data ber is not set as a FINS TCP client in the Unit Setup 32 Service Command data While a remote node change stopped cannot was being processed for the perform operation specified connection number a request for a change was received and the processing was stopped 40 Incorrect High speed The high speed option for the socket service option for socket socket service was enabled in mode service in Unit the Unit settings and the settings socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Unit settings IP address conversion failed IP address con IP address conversion is set for version in Unit automatic conversion only settings 31 Connection cannot be changed 05 Parameter error 23 Environ ment error no such Unit 07 Configuration error 230 because there is too much traf reduce traffic at the Ethernet fic at the local node preventing data from being sent Unit settings The socket is not open for Sys t
65. case When communications are executed by UDP IP this port number must be allocated to the communi cations service The default setting for the FINS UDP local UDP port number i e the Ether net Unit s UDP port number is 9600 To set another number make the setting for the FINS UDP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup At the Ethernet Unit a UDP IP frame received with a FINS UDP port number is recognized as a FINS frame Procedure for Using FINS UDP 1 Make the basic settings Refer to SECTION 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks y Make the settings in the Unit Setup With the CX Programmer connected online select the Ethernet Unit in the CX Programmer s I O Table Window Right click and select Unit Setup Then make the following settings in the Unit Setup Window Setup Tab e Broadcast e FINS UDP port Default 9600 e P address table for the IP address table method only J 3 Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC y 4 Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Note Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted
66. depend ing on the IP address class Four bytes are reserved for setting the IP network address so set the network number from the beginning and then set 00 in the remaining space A maximum of eight settings can be registered The default is for nothing to be set Settings In this example setting for Node A refer to the diagram above a node with an IP address of 130 26 1 1 is connected to an IP router with an IP address of 130 25 36 253 Insert Router IP Address IF Address 130 Routers IP Address 130 Only one default IP router can be set The default IP router is selected when no Network ID exists in the IP router table for the destination network number To set the default IP router set 0 0 0 0 for the IP address and set the default IP router s IP address for the router address 2 9 Unit Setup for Particular Applications FINS UDP FINS TCP 50 Aside from the basic settings the required settings vary depending on the particular communications applications that are used For details on settings refer to SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup CX Programmer tab Settings FINS UDP Port No IP Address Table Destination IP Address Change Dynamically For details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks Use CX Integrator to make routing table settings as required CX Programmer tab FINS TOP Port No FINS TCP FINS TCP Connection Setup For
67. details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks Unit Setup for Particular Applications Section 2 9 Socket Services Mail Reception Use CX Integrator to make routing table settings as required CX Programmer tab Seming CX Programmer tab Settings For details refer to SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications EX Programmertab Setas ONS Vail Address Send Wal For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications CX Programmer tab Settings IP Address Retry timer Retry timer IP IP Address ssi mas o ooo Hostname si Port No No akee Name Mail password atam oo Server access interval time Server access interval time interval time 51 Communications Test Section 2 10 CX Programmer tab Settings Receive Mail Posting Mail Address Protection Setting Receive Attached File Setting Receive Command Setting For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Man ual Construction of Applications Automatic Clock Adjustment Web Functions ex Programmertab Betis DNS For details refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications CX Programmer Setting item tab HTTP Use Web function For details refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Funct
68. e Mounting or dismounting l O Units CPU Units Memory Packs or Master Units e Assembling the Units e Setting DIP switches or rotary switches e Connecting cables or wiring the system N Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the Ethernet Unit or the system or could damage the Ethernet Unit Always heed these precautions e Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes e Interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures in external cir cuits i e not in the Programmable Controller must be provided by the customer e Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short cir cuiting may result in burning e Do not install the Unit near devices that generate strong high frequency noise e Do not drop the Unit or subject it to excessive vibration or shock e
69. ever are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation The settings that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER DATA READ page 162 and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ page 199 This command is supported for CJ series Ethernet Units only 27 67 Command code Command Response Number of IP address Subnet mask code code addresses FINS node number Number of Addresses Response The number of sets of FINS node addresses IP addresses and subnet masks being returned The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 1 decimal FINS Node Address Response Node address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal Command Response Reference Section 7 3 IP Address Response The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal If the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled 0 0 0 0 is returned Subnet Mask Response The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal Response Codes 0000 1001 Command too large 201 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 202 SECTION 8 Troubleshooting This section describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that sometimes occur with Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications The Ethernet Unit makes up part of
70. function is provided in Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later This enables use of a Web browser to read the Ethernet Unit s system settings and statuses Network Connection with Controller Link The Ethernet information network can be connected to the Controller Link control system network by using the FINS communications service function This enables a PLC on a Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC on an Ethernet network and it allows data to be exchanged between them 10 System Configuration Section 1 3 Full Range of Functions for Handling Troubles A full range of functions is provided for promptly handling any troubles that may arise e Self diagnostic function when power is turned ON e Remote node connection check by PING command e Remote node connection check by internode test e Error log for recording error information when an error occurs e Notification by e mail when an error occurs 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 1 System Configuration CX Programmer CX Integrator FinsGateway 3 Hub 2 Twisted pair cable 1 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit 100Base TX 1 CS1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit 100Base TX d CJ series CS series PLC 1 3 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network The basic configuration for a 100Base TX Ethernet System consists of one hub to which nodes are attached in star form using twisted pair cabl
71. guarantee that a message will reach the desti nation node A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise To prevent this from occurring when using message services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries so specify a number other than 0 139 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 RECV 098 With the RECV 098 instruction the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Remote node number N RECV 98 S Remote node beginning word D Local beginning word D C First word of control data below 15 0 cf y 1 i i ee ue i Number of ti d L Number of retries a y pe woras am i O to F Hex O to 15 retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words Communications port number 0 to 7 15 11 87 0 cal o o Response ecg ec 0 Required Destination network number 1 Not required 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 11 87 0 ely caf y y L Destination Unit address Response monitor time 0000 Hex 2 s 00 Hex CPU Unit 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board in units of 0
72. ida 69 El AAA O es Ea EN 70 IS Receive Mall EA AAA ia PES 12 I Auto AdjUSE lie dra dass ci aa pais 74 A A Be Gaeta EE E as ae Sea as oe alan E 75 61 Setup Section 3 1 3 1 Setup ltem Broadcast IP Address Sub net Mask Enable CIDR FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port 62 CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters Ele Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All1 438501 Default 9600 Default 9600 0 min 0 default 120 C AllO 4 2650 C User defined User defined Tone ee Performance of socket service Pp 0 0 0 High Speed i i Conversion Baud Rate f Auto dynamic e Auto Es mel lea Auto Static C 10BASE T e Destination IF is changed dynamically oe ee C Combined Destination IP is Not changed dynamically Enable CIDR CIP address table ETN11 compatible mode FIP IP Address T able IP Router Table Login Password Port Ho o 0 Defanilt 21 irs Del Ing Del LirensfetUrittoPt Transfer to Uria Compare Sotsw_ estat SetDefauts Cancel Defaul Set the method for specifying IP addresses for broadcasting in FINS All 1 4 3BSD UDP e All 1 4 3BSD Broadcast with host number set to all ones e All O 4 2BSD Broadcast with host number set to all zeros Normally the default setting should be used Set the local IP address for th
73. if a FINS command has an abnormal completion it will not be reflected in the communications port completion code For details refer to Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes for CMND 490 below Bits 08 to 15 in the communications port completion code correspond to the first byte of the response code and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second byte For details refer to 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND 490 Errors that occur when CMND 490 is used generate a Communications Port Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in the following cases e When a response timeout error has occurred e When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum value for the Unit i e 2 000 bytes for the Ethernet Unit e When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of reception bytes that has been set The response is not stored in this case Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses stored from the beginning response storage word onwards Be careful of these because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are not recorded in a communications port completion code Timing of Communications Flag Changes e The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communica tions and turns ON when they are completed regardless of whether or not an error occ
74. is returned as one of the numbers shown in the following table Refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of transitions Stage 00 00 00 OA TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL All the above values are set to O if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup Precautions Response Codes 0000 1001 Command too large 7 3 28 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses 27 65 Command Block Command code Response Block y A AA Command Response Number Address code code of addresses information 199 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Response Codes Number of Addresses Response The number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses being returned The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 1 decimal Address Information Pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses Each pair requires 6 bytes and has the following configuration 1 6 T MS FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal IP Address IP address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal 0000 1001 Command too large 7 3 29 IP ADDRESS READ Command Block Response Block Parameters 200 Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup and the FINS node address The values read with this command how
75. load must be kept down to a reasonable level To accomplish this follow the proce dure below 1 Specify the node where FINS frames seem to be concentrated 2 Referring to 6 6 6 Transmission Delays estimate the total processing time for all of the FINS frames processed at that node 3 Set the timeout value for all of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1 5 times the total processing time for all of the FINS frames 4 As much as possible implement communications traffic testing up to the point of actual system operation If any problem occurs adjust the traffic 5 If acommercially available protocol analyzer can be used then the actual FINS frame processing time i e the time from when a command is re ceived at the Ethernet Unit until a response is sent can be measured un der high traffic conditions and the communications traffic can be further adjusted as required SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that are returned by the Ethernet Unit 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 0 0 00 158 Patel Command Code List sarres taaan 158 Tele2 Response Code List 4 25 Aria 158 Jez SOCKET PPLUCAIONS da A yew bebe oe ey Ree 159 TE ROUMIats os cad ON 159 1 22 PLC Memory Areas ss nitratos ds do 160 7 3 Command Response Reference xc yuck win c
76. network In such a case it can be help ful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several subnetworks This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet number Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single network ID To establish subnetworks the host ID in the IP address is divided into a sub net ID and a host ID by using a setting called the subnet mask The subnet mask indicates which part of the host ID is to be used as the subnet ID All bits in the subnet mask that correspond to the bits in the IP address used either as the network ID or subnet ID are set to 1 and the remaining bits which corre spond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the host ID are set to O The following example shows the subnet mask for an 8 bit subnet ID used in a class B IP address Bit 31 30 16 15 00 Class B alol Network ID 14 bits Host ID 16 bits The network mask depends on the class Apply the subnet mask for this Network mask 111111111111111 10000000000000 00 0 FFFFOOOO Subnet mask 11111111111111111111111100000 0 0 0 FFFFF OO Subnet mask 11111111111111111111111100000 00 0 FPP Fe 00 D SA a SS Network ID Subnet ID Host ID Set the same subnet mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork If a subnet mask is not set default setting of 0 0 0 0 or if an illegal value is s
77. number Application level Internet level eee Must be allocated i address Physical level Ethernet Automatically allocated Ethernet address Note Use the Node No rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit to set the FINS node address Allocating Addresses to Ethernet Units Ethernet Unit FINS The IP address FINS UDP port number and FINS TCP port number set for Message Reception the Ethernet Unit are mainly used when receiving FINS communications mes sages Application level Transport level Internet level Yo Physical level PAN _ Receives communications data conforming to Ethernet address IP address UDP port number and FINS node number Ethernet V2 IP UDP FINS header FINS data T e Ethernet address A fixed number is assigned to each Ethernet Unit and it cannot be changed e IP address Either use the default IP address 192 168 250 FINS_node numben or set the address in the word allocated in the DM Area or in the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer 96 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Pairing IP Addresses with FINS Node Addresses at Local Nodes Sending Ethernet Unit FINS Messages e FINS UDP port number Either use the default FINS UDP port number 9600 or set the number using the CX Program mer s Unit Setup e FINS TCP port number Either use the default FINS TCP port number 9600 or set the number using the CX
78. on the following pages For details regarding the related communications services shown in the diagram refer to the indicated sections Send Mail Status 1 2 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Send Mail Status 1 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 GITET ATT ATT LL status of Send Condition Setting 1 Status of Send Condition Setting 2 Status of Send Condition Setting 3 Status of Send Condition Setting 4 Send Mail Status 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LL status of Send Condition Setting 5 Status of Send Condition Setting 6 Status of Send Condition Setting 7 Status of Send Condition Setting 8 The transmission status of user mail periodic mail and error log mail are stored in this word as shown in the following table OFF OFF OFF Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch No mail is being sent OFF OFF Mail is being sent or oF OFF Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch The previous mail transmission was completed normally ON OFF Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch An error occurred in the previous mail transmis sion Mail cannot be sent system setting error While mail is being sent the transmission status of the three bits each for send condition settings 1 to 8 i e bits 02 01 and 00 bits 06 05 and 04 or bits 10 09 an 08 are O O and 1 respec
79. processing for specified connection number aborted because change request received during pro cessing 7 3 20 FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ Reads the FINS TCP connection status EJ Command FINS TCP code connection No Command Block Response Block Command Response FINS TCP Connection Local IP address Local TCP Remote IP Remote TCP TCP transition code code connection service port number address port number No 186 Command Response Reference Parameters FIFINS TCP Connection No Command Response Connection Service Response Local IP Address Response Local TCP Port Number Response Remote IP Address Response Remote TCP Port Number Response TCP Transitions Response Response Codes 7 3 21 Section 7 3 Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status is to be read Response Specifies the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status was read Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS TCP connection as a number 0003 FINS TCP server 0004 FINS TCP client Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal Specifies the TCP port number for the local node Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers For details on TCP status changes refer to Appendix C TCP S
80. sending data ready to send Send Data w Sending data Yellow a receiving data ready to receive Yellow Link not established between hubs pe Link established between hubs Yellow Not lit oe of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services is in At least one of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services is in use Yellow Not lit FTP server on standby FTP iia Service Lit FTP server operating one user connected HOST Yellow C lit Server DNS SMTP POP3 or SNTP not being used Server connection sta Flashing An error has occurred in the server connection tus Lit The server connection is normal oa socket in use 26 Comparison with Previous Models Section 1 7 1 7 Comparison with Previous Models JO Previous models Nemmodels S CJ1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN21 PLC maintenance via the Internet Not possible to send FINS commands from a personal Can send commands including FINS com mands by e mail over the Internet from a personal computer to the PLC using the mail receive function Server specification Specification by IP address Specification by IP address or by host name only using the DNS client function Automatic IP Not possible fora computer A computer automatically acquiring IP computer to the PLC via the Internet FINS com Communi cations ser vice address acquisi automatically acquiring IP addresses can send commands to the PLC ti
81. small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 UNIT Setting range No O to F 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs dedicated areas are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Alloca tions Setting the Node Address Note Relation to IP Addresses 32 With the FINS communications service when there are multiple Ethernet Units connected to the Ethernet network the Ethernet Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network e Unit Version e Unit Version 1 5 or Later 1 4 or Earlier E 4AN NODE 1425 NODE See EKAM Gee No A a at SRA NOS SOS SY y16 VIV x16 DEY x16 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal San SURRY 0 x16 The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When using the automatic generation method either dy
82. status using the FINS command READ PROTOCOL STATUS The UDP socket specified by the Y destination UDP port number in the send parameters is not opening at the remote node Have any failures to reach the destination been counted in the ICMP status Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS There may be too much traffic on the y network and UDP packets may be Have any send errors occurred getting corrupted Use TCP sockets or adjust the network to reduce excessive traffic Check the reception status on the remote node Return to the procedure for general problems 217 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 4 TCP Socket Problems General Problems General Problems Go through the procedure in 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 before starting this procedure Is the response code a value other than 0000 y Go to 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Go to 8 5 Results Storage Area Response Codes There will be no Y response code in the results storage area Is the response code in the results storage area a value other than 0000 if Socket Service Request Switches are being used Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS y _ There may be too much traffic going on the network Reduce network traffic Have any
83. the following diagram The components that form the various layers are defined below the diagram Memory Card CS CJ series CPU Unit EM File Memory CS CJ series FTP 16 Socket services 1 2 3 FINS communi CPU Unit cation service Socket E mail E mail transmis reception 7 FINS services sion FINS UDP FINS TCP 9 SMTP 10 POP3 8 FTP server 10 11 12 6 TCP Ethernet 3 ICMP 4 ARP Unit Ethernet Ver 2 0 The Version 2 0 Ethernet frame format is used for communications IP Internet Protocol Transfers datagrams to destination nodes using IP addresses ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Supports IP communications by signalling errors in data transfers ARP Address Resolution Protocol Determines the Ethernet address i e physical address by broadcasting based on the target IP address UDP User Datagram Protocol Performs data communications Data resends priority control flow control and other measures to ensure communications reliability are not per formed for UDP communications so the transmitted data may not arrive at the destination node To increase reliability it is necessary to program spe cial measures into the user applications TCP Transmission Control Protocol Performs communications after establishing a connection e a virtual cir cuit with the destination node providing a highly reliable communications service FINS Factory Interface
84. the entire network We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet Units to allow immediate recovery of the network Replacing an Ethernet Unit Observe the following precautions when replacing the Ethernet Unit e Always turn OFF the power supply before replacing the Ethernet Unit e Check that the spare Ethernet Unit is operating normally before replacing a defective Unit with it e When returning a defective Unit for repairs provide as much written information as possible on the symp toms of the problem e If a problem occurs with poor contacts wipe the contacts with a clean cloth soaked with industrial alcohol Carefully remove any lint remaining on the contacts before replacing the Unit Settings after Replacing an Ethernet Unit After replacing an Ethernet Unit set the following to the same settings as were used on the previous Unit e Unit number e Node address Settings after Replacing a CPU The EEPROM in the PC s CPU holds the information listed below This information must be stored in any new CPU used to replace a defective one e Routing tables e System Setup for the Ethernet Unit 243 Maintenance Appendix E 244 Appendix F Inspections Carry out regular inspections to ensure the Ethernet Unit is functioning perfectly ltems Most of the parts that make up an Ethernet Unit are semiconductor components None of the parts in the Unit will wear out after a specific lifetime but some parts may dete
85. the length of send data UDP or TCP 1 to 1 982 bytes UDP broadcasts 1 to 1 472 bytes nated IP network segment Check the commu nications path 0053 ETIMEDOUT Connection timed out TCP timed Check the remote host and communications out path 0063 ESELABORT Used for internal Ethernet Unit pro Close the local socket and try reopening it cessing Internal memory cannot be allocated Traffic is too high at the Ethernet Unit Correct 0066 None the user application to reduce traffic at the be provided for processing the service cannot Ethernet Unit 0080 None Timed out for passive TCP open Either the remote node is not executing an request active TCP open or there is a block on the net work 232 Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 5 Response UNIX error Description Probable remedy code message 0081 None Closed by close command during No action is necessarily called for socket servicing 0082 None Connection with remote node not The remote IP address and TCP port number achieved for passive TCP open settings differ from those of the remote socket request active side 233 Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 5 234 Appendix A Ethernet Network Parameters Hold timer 758S The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within 75S Resend timer Initial value The resend timer is
86. will appear as shown be low depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an er ror occurred e If the Mode Change was Completed Normally Mode address Indicators x6 xe RUN ERC ERH o 1 Fen tk ak 58 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 e If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change Node address Indicators caet Ae RUN ERG ERM o Feng n non Note Ifan error occurs in the mode change remove the Ethernet Unit create the I O tables and correct the settings using the procedures described in this section 7 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address to its original setting 8 Turn ON the power to the PLC Node address Indicators aet Ser ON C 1 C l o on on onverting from ETN21 Mode to ETN11 Mode Turn OFF the power to the PLC and set the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address as follows Node address Indicators ESMESCAM MIE ERN o o non non non Turn ON the power to the PLC The Unit s indicators will change as follows Node address indicators sde aer RUN ERG ERAT o o non m non Set the rotary switches for the node address to OF There will be no change to the indicators Node address Indicators aer I ee RUN ERE I Eee Po F nom m nom Set the rotary switches for the node address to FF The RUN in
87. 00 01 turns ON Input ClO 1200 02 remains ON from the start of RECV 098 execution until completion Control Data Creation D00005 00 10 Number of reception words 16 D 00007 20 00 Source node number 32 Source unit address O D00008 07 05 Response required Communications port No used 7 Number of retries 5 DO0009 00 00 Response monitor time Default A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100 at network number 3 node number 32 unit address O the PLC is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the local node Reset Input Creation Reception Error Display Reception Data Processing If there is no reception processing completion error the 16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 on wards is stored at D00040 onwards With CS CJ series PLCs the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits O to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR 260 instruction is be ing executed using the ports corresponding to those flags 2 Before using the sample program as is confirm that the memory areas words and bits used in the sample program are not already being used in the user program o r by Special I O Units 148 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 6 6 6 Transmission Delays SEND 090 SEND 090 executed in user program CPU Bus Unit The methods of computing the maximum time required from execution of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions until processing
88. 03 SNTP name 03 Port num ber 04 Other parameters 209 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Detailed error code Correction EE code 1st byte 2nd byte 02 03C2 FINS TCP packet discarded 01 to 10 Have the FINS TCP connection Connection Reopened status checked when a number because SEND 090 RECV 098 or remote node CMND 490 instruction is exe closed cuted in the ladder program 03 Reopened because of reception error 04 Reopened because of transmission error 05 Reopened because RST received from remote node 06 Reopened because of no keep alive response 07 Illegal Refer to Operation Manual Con a FINS TCP struction of Applications SEC procedure TION 7 and correct the remote node application on a personal computer 08 Insuffi There is too much load traffic on cient mem the Ethernet Unit Correct the sys ory during tem so that traffic is not concen server pro trated cessing 09 Insuffi cient mem ory during client pro cessing OA Insuffi cient mem ory during node switch ing 03C3 FINS UDP packet discarded 01 to FE The automatic generation static Transmission method was used as the IP source node _ address conversion method so address remote IP address information in internal memory could not be changed 210 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Detailed error code Correction EE code 1st byte 2nd byte PROM 03C4 Server connection
89. 04 The automatic clock adjustment can be executed by turning this switch ON The SNTP server required for the automatic clock adjustment is set in the Unit Setup After the automatic clock adjustment has been completed the Ethernet Unit will automatically turn this switch OFF Until then do not forcibly manipulate the switch 79 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Status of UDP TCP Sockets 1 to 8 a Unit to CPU Unit 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 sono CT T EEA AAA 1 1 Data Received Flag Opening Flag Results Storage Error Flag Receiving Flag TCP UDP Open Flag Sending Flag Closing Flag Manipulated Unit operation Reference by Opening Flag Unit ON during open processing Turns Operation Manual Con ON when open request is received struction of Applica Unit OFF when open processing has tions SECTION 6 been completed Receiving Flag Unit ON during receive processing Turns ON when receive request is received if high speed option is dis abled and remains OFF when high speed processing is enabled g OFF when receive processing has been completed Sending Flag hd ON during send processing Turns ON when receive request is received if high speed option is disabled and remains OFF when high speed pro cessing is enabled basil ial OFF when send processing has E completed Closing Flag om ON during close processing Turns iS when close request is received o OFF when close p
90. 04 2 3 PLC 4 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus Relay Relay network Unit an O network node 020 1 2 030 020 003 3 PLC 5 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 01 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 6 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay 0 network Unit No network network node 1 030 05 1 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 PLC 7 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 030 06 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 127 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 6 5 Using FINS Applications 6 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server The following examples show how to connect online from a CX Programmer on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network m System Configuration Example 1 No Routing In this example an online connection is made by FINS UDP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer or CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic CX Programmer or CX Integrator Node number 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 Ethernet Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic
91. 096 bytes The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver initial value of maxi gence of TCP sockets Actually the node negotiates with the remote mum window size node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes The window size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of the remote node when processing communications Fragment size 1 500 bytes Data packets are fragmented into 1 500 byte IP packets UDP data is separated into 1 472 byte fragments before sending Segment size 1 024 bytes TCP data is separated into 1 024 byte units unless the segments are dif ferent in which case it will be separated into 536 byte units TTL Time to Live Decremented each time an IP router is passed 235 Ethernet Network Parameters Appendix A 236 Appendix B Buffer Configuration UDP socket reception request buffers 8 x 9 016 max N TCP socket See note 1 reception NS request buffers 8 x 4 096 max p packet input SS A queue 50 max x 1 500 bytes FTP service a reception buffer 4 096 bytes Y FINS reception DN See note 1 CPU Unit buffer 16 383 FINS processing J bytes max buffers 192 x Communications 2 020 bytes controller Network x 4 096 max A
92. 1 Depending on the Internet service provider ISP the use of POP before SMTP may be defined from the standpoint of security considerations This Unit handles POP before SMTP Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 5 2 An SMTP server is required to use the mail send function 3 Mail server settings require specialized knowledge so they should al ways be handled by the network administrator 4 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing this function 5 Mail my not always be delivered Depending on factors such as the con dition of the network mail that has been sent may not arrive at its desti nation Mail Receive Function With the mail receive function the user writes a command into the e mail and then sends the e mail to the Ethernet Unit The Ethernet Unit receives e mail at regular intervals executes the commands and sends back responses by e mail E mail can be received over the Internet and not just from within the intranet POP3 server Ethernet C Ethernet Unit CS CJ series FIII AA CPU Unit The following types of commands can be sent to the PLC l O memory read and write backup operating mode changes and file transfers of 1 Mbyte or less Note 1 A POPS server is required to use the mail receive function 2 Mail server settings require specialized knowledge so they should al ways be handled by the network administ
93. 3 67 206 DHCP TRUE Com 390 Ethernet Adapter FINS IP Conversion Automatic generation Diynamic C Automatic generation Static Donot support DHCP client C IF table automatic generation P address table DO Heke Gun node adress trom lPeddresz e UDP port number Set the local UDP port number for the personal com puter Ethernet port The default is 9600 e Priority Network Card If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal computer select the Network Card that is to be given priority e FINS IP address conver Set the IP address conversion method sion 133 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 e UDP Nodes Tab Automatic Generation Method Dynamic or Passive ETN_UNIT Properties Network number Network type Userdeined IF address Network number Network tupe Userdelimedi IF address y Add Delete Property Explore cad J Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box 134 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Ethernet Node Definition Useraehneai Ippe mane Mea attire Maier fe pire Wie pi e Node address Set the remote FINS node address e P address Set the remote IP address e TCP Nodes Tab ETN_UNIT Properties Useroelneni Appii Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box
94. 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Bit S f Broad dd i ystem setup format roadcast address setting IP address conversion method UDP port No setting for FINS TCP port No setting for FINS TCP Transmission speed setting SNTP server specification method SMTP server specification method POP server specification method Broadcast Address Setting O Broadcast with host number set to all ones 4 3BSD specifications 1 Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes 4 2BSD specifications IP Address Conversion Method Setting 00 01 Automatic generation method 10 IP address table reference method 11 Combined method IP address table reference automatic generation FINS UDP Port Number Setting 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value 162 Command Response Reference Ethernet Address Response Response Codes Command Block Response Block FFINS TCP Port Number Settin 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value Baud Rate settin O Automatic detection 1 10Base T SNTP Server Specification Method O IP address 1 Host name SMTP Server Specification Method O IP address 1 Host name POP Server Specification Method O IP address 1 Host name System Setup Format Bit address Format classification o b b p femme o b fo h TENA mode Section 7 3 The Ethernet address of the Ethernet Unit is returned The Ethernet address is the address marked on the label on the side of the Ethernet Unit 0000 1001 Command too la
95. 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following dia gram 1 6 bytes Yr al FINS node number IP address FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command in hexadecimal IP Address IP number used by TCP IP protocol in hexadecimal If the IP address table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP address table when the command is executed will be returned and the command exe cution will end normally An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set to the automatic generation method Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes Response code Description 0000 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small 2307 IP address conversion method is set to the automatic genera tion method 7 3 24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Number of Records Command Response Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response IP Router table Records Response Reads the IP router table Command Number code of records Command Response Maximum Number Number IP router ___ IP router code code number ofstored ofrecords table records table records of stored records records The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 0 to 8 decimal i
96. 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 0 packets received 100 packets loss gt Refer to operating system documentation for your host computer for details about using the host computer s PING command 2 11 Converting from Previous Models 54 The specifications for these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 are compatible with those for previous models CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 so previous models being used with existing equipment can be easily replaced by the new models Many of the specifications for the new Ethernet Units have been expanded however so there will be a number of limitations if the Unit is simply replaced In particular the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area is formatted for the previ ous models so there is no way to make the settings for the expanded specifi cations To remove these limitations it is necessary to change the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup format from ETN11 mode to ETN21 mode Refer to Changing the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format below for instructions on how to make the change If the format change is from ETN11 mode to ETN21 mode then there will be no effect on previous applications If the change is from ETN21 mode to ETN11 mode however then certain limitations will go into effect The following table shows the limitations that apply when operating in ETN11 mode e Specifications in ETNTT mode Baud rate e Automatic detection 100Base TX or 10Base T
97. AD 0006 199 T329 JP ADDRESS READ iene yaaa hae cay aa 200 157 Command Codes and Response Codes Section 7 1 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 7 1 1 Command Code List The command codes listed in the following table can be sent to an Ethernet Unit Page ma a R 06 fo CONTROLLER STATUS READ t63 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 166 BROADCAST DATA SEND ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR WS a is 27 UDP OPEN REQUEST UDP RECEIVE REQUEST UDP SEND REQUEST UDP CLOSE REQUEST PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST TCP RECEIVE REQUEST TCP SEND REQUEST TCP CLOSE REQUEST 20 PING CON FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE 185 NODE CHANGE REQUEST FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS 186 READ IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE IP ADDRESS WRITE CJ Series only IP ADDRESS TABLE READ IP ROUTER TABLE READ PROTOCOL STATUS READ MEMORY STATUS READ SOCKET STATUS READ ADDRESS INFORMATION READ IP ADDRESS READ 7 1 2 Response Code List Response codes are 2 byte codes which indicate the results of command execution They are returned in the response following the command code The first byte of a response code is the MRES main response code which categorizes the results of command execution The second byte is the SRES sub response code which specifies the results MRC Main request code Command Response SRC Sub request code code code MRES Main response code SRES Sub response code MRC SRC MRES SRES
98. CP OPEN REQUEST PASSIVE 174 TCP Passive Open Request Switch 85 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST 180 TCP SEND REQUEST 181 TCP IP 3 8 117 creating communications applications 7 TCP IP keep alive 49 TCP UDP Open Flag 80 terminal blocks xxiii Test command 6 73 Timer Area 138 Index timers 235 transmission delays 149 distance CJ series 14 CS series 14 media CJ series 14 CS series 14 path CJ series 14 CS series 14 troubleshooting FINS communications 214 FTP server 221 procedures 213 socket services 231 startup 213 TCP sockets 218 UDP sockets 215 UNIX error messages 231 using indicators 204 using response codes 227 twisted pair cables 11 precautions 35 recommended models 35 TXT extension 73 U UDP CLOSE REQUEST 173 UDP communications 16 sockets troubleshooting 215 UDP Nodes Tab 134 UDP OPEN REQUEST 169 UDP Open Request Switch 85 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST 170 UDP SEND REQUEST 172 UDP IP 2 8 117 creating communications applications 7 UDP TCP sockets status bits 80 UMBackup command 6 73 Unit Number Switch 23 unit numbers setting 31 32 UNIX error messages 231 Use IP address to protect field 64 259 Index Use POP before SMTP field 67 V Visual BASIC 12 Visual C 12 W weight CJ series 14 CS series 14 wiring cables 38 precautions 38 word addresses 90 160 Word value change field 71 Work Area 138 260 Revision
99. CPU Unit Memory in the CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Lit There is a mistake in the settings for a Read the error status and history server DNS SMTP POPS or SNTP in and correct the data that is causing the Unit Setup the error If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Not lit Lit An error occurred in communications with Inspect the communications path the server Ethernet Unit cable connections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error Lit Lit An error occurred in EEPROM Restart the PLC If the problem per sists replace the Ethernet Unit 204 Error Status Section 8 2 RUN ERC ERH LNK HOST Probably cause Correction Lit Flash The IP address is set incorrectly Correct the IP address Do not set ing any of the following IP addresses e Host IDs that are all O or all 1 e Network IDs that are all O or all 1 e Subnetwork IDs that are all 1 e Addresses beginning with 127 7F Hex The node address set on the rotary Make sure that the node address switch on the front of the Unit does not and the last byte of the IP address agree with the host ID in the IP address are the same and set other host IDs This probably can occur when the to O address conversion method is set for Change the address conversion automati
100. D Reads the model numbers of the device corresponding to addresses Status reading 06 01 CPUUNIT STATUS READ Reads the status of the CPU Unit 20 CYCLE TIME READ Reads the maximum minimum and average cycle time CLOCK READ Reads the present year month date minute second and day of the week Time data access i 07 02 CLOCK WRITE Changes the present year month date minute second or day of the week 0 MESSAGE READ CLEAR Reads and clears messages and reads FAL FALS messages OC 01 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it OC 02 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it OC 03 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right that has been acquired 03 ERROR CLEAR 2 Message display Access rights ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR Clears the error log pointer 142 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Usage Command Function ER File memory 2 m FILE NAME READ Reads file memory data SINGLE FILE READ Reads a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file SINGLE FILE WRITE Writes a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file FILE MEMORY FORMAT Formats initializes the file memory 22 05 FILE DELETE Deletes specified files stored in the file memory 22 07 FILE COPY Copies files from one file memory to
101. FileRead 6 FileWrite 6 FinsSend 6 IOMRead 6 IOMWrite 6 MailLogClear 6 MailLogRead 6 PARAMBackup 6 Test 6 UMBackup 6 Communication Unit Tab 133 communications cables xxv Communications Port Enabled Flags 90 143 Communications Port Error Flags 143 connectors recommended models 35 Contact Output Units installation 37 interference with Ethernet 37 253 precautions 37 CONTROLLER DATA READ 162 Controller Link 10 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 163 Conversion field 63 Counter Area 138 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits 91 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area 12 format 54 CPU Bus Units flags 90 Restart Bits 91 CPU condition field 71 CQM1 PROOI E 39 crimp terminals xxiv CS1W CN114 39 CS1W CN224 39 CS1W CN624 39 CS1W ETNO1 compatibility 54 CS1W ETNI1 comparison 27 compatibility 54 CS1W KS001 E 39 CSV extension 73 current consumption CJ series 14 CS series 14 Custom I to 3 field 73 CX Integrator 12 39 creating routing tables 125 CX Programmer 39 connecting to PLC 2 128 from personal computer 3 through multiple segments 3 using wireless LAN 3 within same segment 2 Ethernet Unit Setup 41 Index D data areas FINS communications 160 Data Receive
102. FinsGateway is selected as the network type make sure that the frame length is set to 2 000 bytes max Example Network Settings Driver Tab Network Settings Ethernet XK Network Driver Workstation Mode Number 1 E Auto detect IF Address Fort Number 192 168 2350 a la Lancel Help 130 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 m System Configuration Example 2 Using Routing Tables In this example an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC on a Controller Link network PLC 3 below from a CX Programmer or CX Integra tor connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic CX Programmer or CX Integrator Controller Link Unit Node address 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 Ethernet Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Gateway between networks PLC1 Ethernet Unit node address 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 Ethernet Unit unit number O Controller Link Unit node address 1 Controller Link Unit unit number 1 li Link Unit Controller Link Unit Target PLE Node address 2 lt A_Node ddress 3 Ethernet network address 1 PLC2 PLCS Routing according to routing table Routing to final network address 2 requires relaying through node address 2 of relay network address 1 Ethernet Unit Controller Link network address 2 CX Program
103. History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W420 E1 06 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revisioncode Date Revised content July 2003 Original production g Information was added for new functions available with new versions of the CX Programmer and Ethernet Unit including the Web function described in new sub section 2 8 and Appendix G The following revisions were also made Page xiv Added information on unit versions Page 3 Added information for CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher Page 7 Corrected or to and in paragraph on automatic clock adjustment Pages 8 and 9 Added information on Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later Page 12 Added information on CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher Page 17 Changed note Page 25 Corrected information for ERH indicator Page 26 Added information on upgrade to unit version Page 28 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 in Note 1 Page 31 Corrected 1 2 to 0 9 and 0 8 to 0 4 in Note Page 40 Changed screen Page 41 Changed screen corrected Right click to Click in steps 6 and 7 and added new sub section on the Web function Page 43 Changed screen Page 45 Added settings to tables Page 47 Added table of settings for HTT
104. ILIP CJ1M CPULIL CJ1G CPULIL W394 CS1G H CPULILIH CS1G H CPULILIEV1 CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G CPULIL CJ1M CPULIL W340 CS1G H CPULILIH CS1G H CPULILIEV1 CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G CPULIL CJ1M CPULIL XIV Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Net works this manual Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Applications Communications Commands Refer ence Manual Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Programmable Con trollers Program ming Manual Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Provides information on operating and installing 100Base TX Ethernet Units including details on basic settings and FINS communications Refer to the Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communications service Provides information on constructing host applications for 100Base TX Ethernet Units including functions for send ing receiving mail socket service automatic clock adjust ment FTP server functions and FINS communications Ethernet Units Oper Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base 5 ation Manual and 10Base T Ethernet Units Descr
105. Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws terminal block screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction e Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit e Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction e Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning e Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning e Wire all connections correctly e Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com pletely e Make sure that the terminal blocks expansion cables and other items with locking devices are locked in place e When transporting the Unit use special packing boxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation XXIV Conformance to EC Directives 6 e Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation e Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable e Separate the communications cables from the power line
106. Memory Can you display the EM directory using Is from the host computer Have specified banks of the EM Area been converted to EM File Memory END Has the EM File Memory been initialized Can you display the MEMCARD directory using Is from the host computer Is a Memory Card not inserted in the PLC Is the Memory Card faulty END The FTP server is connected to another client Wait until the client has finished Correct the computer settings Refer to the documentation for your computer Go to Network Connection Problems Check the login name and password settings Convert to EM File Memory in the PLC System Setup Initialize the EM File Memory from the CX Programmer or other Programming Device Insert a Memory Card Initialize the Memory Card If the problem persists replace the Memory Card if necessary 221 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 File Transfer Problems File transfer problem occurred Are you not connected to the FTP server Return to the previous procedure Make MEMCARD or EM the current directory execute cd MEMCARD or cd EM Is the file you are attempting to get not actuall on the Memory Card Can you execute gef Designate a file actually in the file system Is there insufficient free space available in the file system Can you Y gt D
107. No unit number error 1 Unit number error 0 Normal 1 Error 0 No duplication 1 Duplication Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 3 Word Bi Name Feo somnos A417 A417 00to CPU Bus Unit Error When an error occurs in a data exchange between 0 No error A417 15 Unit Number Flags the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus 4 Error Unit Error Flag A402 07 and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 corre spond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue A427 00to CPU Bus Unit Set When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs 0 No setting error A427 15 ting Error Unit A402 03 and the corresponding flag in A27 are 1 Setting error Number Flags turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers O to F A427 The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue Read Write Bits User Settings Word Bis Neme Description TO Semn A501 00to CPU Bus Unit Bits A501 00 through A501 15 can be turned ON to OFF to ON A501 15 Restart Bits reset CPU Bus Units number 0 through 15 Unit restarted respectively Automatically turned The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when OFF by system after restarting is completed restart processing The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags A302 00 to has been completed A302 15 will turn ON when initialization o
108. ONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR xvii Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses liste
109. P Tab and swapped response and request in dia gram Pages 50 and 58 Changed screen Page 59 Added tem to table and notes Page 60 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 in table Page 71 Added information on HTTP Server Setup and changed screen Page 84 Changed O7CD hex to O7CO hex se 85 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 and corrected information for setting local IP address Page 96 Added information on prohibiting dynamic conversion of remote IP addresses Pages 100 and 101 Corrected table headings Page 124 Added note Page 125 Corrected Controller Unit to Controller Link Unit in diagram Page 126 Corrected Ethernet Unit to Controller Link Unit in information on relay network tables and corrected 2 to 1 for the relay node address Pages 141 and 142 Changed PC to PLC Page 197 Removed CJ Series only from table Page 221 Added error codes to table Page 229 Added table on TCP status information Information was added for new versions of the Ethernet Unit and minor corrections were also made including the following changes Page v Added information on general precautions notation Page vii Removed table Page xiii Added information on warranty and liability Page 28 Added table Page 36 Changed cable in diagram Pages 45 and 247 Replaced diagram Pages 85 and 120 Changed n 24 to n 23 Page 101 Added in
110. P address and subnet mask settings will not be effective until the PC is restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset 7 3 23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ Reads the IP address table 189 Command Response Reference Command Block Response Block Parameters Number of Records Command Response Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response IP Address Table Records Response Precautions 190 Section 7 3 Command Number of code records Command Response Maximum Number Number IP address IP address code code number of stored of records table records table records of stored records records The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned The response returns the actual number of records read The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0020 32 records The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configu ration of the
111. S destination Network number lo Node address Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 136 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 6 6 6 6 1 CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Broadcast Al ones 4 3850 FINS TCP port Default 9600 FINS TCP Tab Not set All defaults are used FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Setup TCP Nodes Tab Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box Node address IP address 192 168 250 2 Destination port number 9600 Keep alive setting Selected yes Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 FINS commands can be sent from the user s ladder diagram program in the PLC by using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions SEND 090 Writes I O data from the local node to another node RECV 098 Reads I O data from another node to the local node CMND 490 Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as send ing and receiving I O memory data to and from other nodes reading informa tion regarding other nodes and so on Communications Specifications The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions temo Specifications Destination 1 1 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 instructions 1 N SEND 090 CMND 490 instructions broadcasting Data length SEND 090 990 words 1 980 bytes max broadcasting 727 words 1 454 bytes RECV 098 990 words 1 980 bytes max CMND 490
112. S server FTP software NS CX Programmer Independent user TA POP3 server Mail software i SCADA software Q application SMTP server E 3 PLC Reporter Compolet J i l SNTP server El lt FinsGateway lt i ES E communications driver UDP TCP socket Ethernet Large files Ethernet AA R E z CX Programmer GS O NS series PT I al Ethernet Unit 1 Connecting the CX Programmer to i PLCs online via Ethernet commands Ethernet Ethernet Unit 7 lt p A S a Wireless FINS message Memory Card communications 2 Sending and receiving data via Ethernet between OMRON PLCs Sending mail 3 Capturing PLC changes and sending the status of equipment to an operator PLC y PYC FINS message Ni communications 7 Automatically adjusting the PLC s internal clock periodically 1 1 2 Determining the Objectives Connecting the CX Programmer to PLCs Online via Ethernet Connecting within the Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS Same Segment UDP FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 The CX Programmer can be connected and used with FINS UDP even if personal computer middleware FinsGateway is not used FinsGateway any version can also be used together with the CX Programmer Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Conne
113. SYSMAC CS and CJ Series CS1W ETN21 100Base TX CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Ethernet Units Construction of Networks OPERATION MANUAL CS1W ETN21 100Base TX CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Ethernet Units Construction of Networks Operation Manual Revised April 2009 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word
114. T half duplex E TCP IP Keep alive Setting Set the Liveness Checking Interval This setting is enabled only when FINS TCP or TCP IP socket services are used When the keep alive function is used with FINS TCP or TCP IP socket ser vices the keep alive communications frame is used to check the status of the connection with the remote node either a server or client if there are no com munications during the time interval set here Up to nine checks are executed at 75 second intervals and if there is no response to any of them then the connection is terminated The default setting 0 is for a specified value of 120 minutes for the Liveness Checking Interval When the prescribed value is used as is it may not be suit able for control system applications Set the checking time as required for the system The setting range is 0 to 65 535 minutes E IP Router Table An IP router table is a table of correspondences for finding IP addresses for the IP routers that relay target segments when the Unit communicates via IP routers with nodes on other IP network segments 130 25 X X Network ID 130 26 X X Network ID 130 25 36 253 130 26 2 254 IP router 49 Unit Setup for Particular Applications Section 2 9 For the IP network address set the network number i e the net ID of the other IP network segment with which communications are to be executed The length of the network number i e the number of bytes will vary
115. TP server 10 22 socket option 159 Socket Service Request Switches 84 socket services 18 51 creating communications applications 7 FINS communications 159 Parameter Areas 88 231 socket option 159 Socket Service Request Switches 84 TCP IP 8 troubleshooting 231 UDP IP 8 SOCKET STATUS READ 198 239 sockets closing TCP 183 UDP 173 numbers 159 opening TCP 174 177 UDP 169 reading status 198 receiving data TCP 180 UDP 170 sending data TCP 181 UDP 172 status 80 TCP sockets status 88 239 troubleshooting 218 testing communications 184 UDP sockets troubleshooting 215 software configuration 16 Software switch field 71 specifications Ethernet Units CJ series 14 CS series 14 FINS communications 137 SRES 159 stack connections 36 startup procedure 30 static electricity XXxiii precautions xxv status reading memory status 196 reading protocol status 192 reading socket status 198 STD extension 73 Sub net Mask field 62 subnet masks 48 95 reading from Unit 162 sub response code 158 See also SRES switches Socket Service Request Switches 84 SYSMAC BUS 2 138 SYSMAC LINK 138 system configuration 11 examples 128 T TCP Active Open Request Switch 85 TCP CLOSE REQUEST 183 TCP communications 16 sockets interface 19 status 239 troubleshooting 218 status 194 TCP indicator 26 TCP Nodes Tab 135 TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE 177 T
116. To set another number make the setting for the FINS TCP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup The FINS TCP port number set in the Unit Setup is used by the FINS TCP server s TCP socket The FINS TCP client s TCP socket uses any TCP port number that can be used at that node With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGate way Ver 2003 an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized At the Ethernet Unit a TCP IP frame that is received is recognized as a FINS frame according to the remote TCP port number in the frame FINS TCP allows up to 16 FINS TCP connections to be established simulta neously and these 16 connections are managed at the Ethernet Unit by con nection numbers When setting connections by means of the FINS TCP settings in the CX Programmer s Unit Setup set them individually using these connection numbers 121 FINS TCP Method Section 6 3 FINS TCP Communications Procedure FINS TCP Connection Status Word n 23 While a connection with a remote node is established the bit corresponding to the FINS TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit words allocated in the CIO Area The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi nated by a communications error or a FINS command i e FINS TCP CON NECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 n 23 Bit 15 corresponds to connection No 16 bit 00 to connection No 1 etc With FINS TCP FINS node ad
117. U Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0 9 N m and the Unit s screws to a torque of 0 4 N m CS1W BC023 BC033 BC053 BC083 BC103 CPU Backplane CS series CPU Rack Can mount to any position with 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Backplane not possible with 2 slot CPU Backplane Up to four Units can be mounted CS1W BI033 BI053 BI083 B1103 CS series Expansion Backplane gt to the slots shown in the diagrams l l on the left CS series Expansion Rack Can mount to any position with 3 5 8 or 10 slots Note 3 5 8 or 10 slots C200H Expansion l O Backplane C200H Expansion Rack Ethernet Unit cannot be mounted to any slots CPU CPU Unit PS Power Supply Unit The CS1W ETN21 Ethernet Units maximum current consumption is 380 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 2 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC Ethernet Units can be connected to either a CJ series CPU Rack or a CJ series Expansion CPU Rack Connect the Ethernet Unit in any of the posi tions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combi nation with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the ma
118. a Gi 15 1 4 3 Software Configuration cie in dados 16 1 5 Overview of Communications Functions 0 0 0 cee eee ees 17 1 5 1 FINS Communications Service 0c cee eee 17 t32 SOCKCUSEIVICES caida risa rada 18 Sed PIP Server BunCu0ns dardos Sees 20 1 5 4 Mail Send Function 0 0 0 0 cece eens 20 t55 Wall Receive FONCION 422504 oe eins oe eS eh Aina 21 1 5 6 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 5 22 1 5 7 Specifying Servers by Host Name 20005 22 1 6 Nomenclature and Functions 0 0 cece eee eee eens 23 1 6 1 Component Names saldar paar od ace A Sree ata 23 EO JUCO aa 23 l 7 Comparison with Previous ModelS o oooooooooooooooo o 27 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Information n n anaana nananana 28 Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 1 1 Ethernet Unit Function Guide 1 1 1 Overall System Configuration Example The following diagram shows an example of an overall system configuration using Ethernet Units 1 Connecting the CX Programmer to the PLCs online via Ethernet 4 CX Programmer J Mail software aT FINS HS mel ES Internet gt 5 Transferring large data files between 6 Configuring an independent communications protocol ini personal computers and PLCs for the host application using TCP IP UDP IP ntrane Firewall a a a al aaa a cna a A a a la alt E 7 Server Room En Office Floor Y DN
119. a Web browser password entry is required to enable display and setting of the parameters Even if the password has not been set the default password ETHER NET must be entered To change this password set a new password in the HTTP Tab of the CX Program mer s Unit Setup or use the Web function and select Settings IP address and Protocols HTTP Note 1 Setting a new Web function password as soon as possible is recommended to prevent unauthorized access 2 The Web function can also be disabled by setting in the Web function option Using the Web Function Setting Password The Ethernet Unit s Web window is displayed by accessing the following URL from the Web browser URL http Ethernet Unit s IP address 0 Use the following procedure to set the Unit s system settings HTTP password setting in this example using Internet Explorer version 6 0 and the Ethernet Unit s Web function 249 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser In this example the URL is specified as http 192 168 250 1 0 using the Ethernet Unit s default IP address 4 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back x el A 2 Search Sv Favorites CL Address 4 OMRON Ethernet unit e Settings e Status View Internet 2 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu 4 OMRON E
120. a network Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can have a negative effect on the entire network We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet Units to allow immediate recovery of the network 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators 0 00000 eee 204 Be ENOC SAL Stee ete a A O OS 6 oe ee eee 205 Boor EMOL aa boi Siete eae eel eel ees 206 S k Error Log Error Codes cicctses cee ra 207 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures 0 0 0c cc eee 213 8 4 1 Startup Problems crisis ancora ooh teh Grease es 213 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 ooooooooommmooo o 214 8 4 3 UDP Socket Problems vin rd a 215 8 4 4 TCP Socket Problems 2 4 t44 in 218 s FIP Service Problems varices 221 8 4 6 Network Connection ProblemsS oooooooooo 223 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes o o o ooooooooo 22 8 5 Results Storage Area Response Codes 0 0 0 231 203 Troubleshooting with Indicators Section 8 1 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators The indicators on the Ethernet Unit can be used to troubleshoot some error The probable cause and correction for errors that can be determined from the LINK HOST RUN ERC and ERH indicators are listed in the following table RUN ERC ERH LNK Host Probably cause Correci n Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being supplied to the CPU Supply power Unit or the power supply v
121. addresses 108 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 Intranet aa a a a a A A A A A A A AA A A A A A A A A A A A A A A AA AAA Personal computer CX Programmer etc Ethernet Private address Not output to Internet Internet Global address v required Intranet Not output to Internet Global address Private address i Private address Personal computer CX Programmer etc Firewall Ethernet Communications Services A global address is required for the Ethernet Unit s IP address when the fol That Require Global lowing communications services are used over the Internet Addresses for Ethernet o Units e FINS communications services e File transfers e Socket services When mail is sent or received over the Internet the Unit s IP address can be a private address 109 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit Intranet m Ps FINS communications l CX Programmer etc FTP FINS TCP client computer Socket Communications in intranet Sending mail Receiving mail Ethernet Unit Private address a sp tt ape Internet E mail can be sent and received through the Internet Intranet A A pee NS E A A ete OE O FINS communications FTP EJ Socket
122. and CX Net a Manual Windows based network configuration tool Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform pro gramming W444 CXONE ALLILIC E CX One Setup Man Describes operating procedures for the CX One FA Inte ual grated Tool Package Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CX One FA Integrated Tool Package W445 CXONE ALLILIC E CX Integrator Opera Describes operating procedures for the CX Integrator net tion Manual work configuration support software for CS CJ series PLCs Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CX Integrator network configuration support software for CS CJ series PLCs W341 CQM1H PROO1 E Programming Con Provides information on how to operate the Programming CQM1 PRO01 E soles Operation Console C200H PRO27 E Manual Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform pro gramming W336 CS1W SCB21 V1 41 V1 Serial Communica Accessing the PLC connected to the CX Programmer via CS1W SCU21 V1 tions Boards and Ethernet or the host computer or other device connect
123. and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2003 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Unit Versions of CS CJ series Unit Versions A unit version has been introduced to manage Units in the CS CJ Series according to diffe
124. asic Settings Section 2 8 6 Make the required settings i e the IP address in this example System Format Parameter F Value Het mask 0 D 0 0 enable CIDE TT TA IT TTT T 1 m m er r gt rm a 7 After entering the correct values click the Set Button followed by the Reg ist Button to register them DIJI SS S Set Cancel lI Reglst lI Reload The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal com puter and temporarily register them in the Ethernet Unit The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registered in the Ethernet to the flash memory non volatile memory of the CPU Unit The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory non volatile memory when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted Therefore when making the unit settings using the Web function always click the Set Button before the Regist Button Otherwise the entered set values will not be used The Set Button and Regist Button are provided on the window for each setting item The functions of the other buttons are as follows e Cancel Button Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was previously set with the Set Button again If the Set Button has not been clicked the value that was read from the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed e Reload Button Use this button read and display th
125. ations Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network The rout ing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS com munications service but also for all relay nodes on the network 6 4 1 Routing Table Overview The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when the FINS communications are used It consists of two tables A local network table and a relay network table Local Network Table The local network table is a table describing the correspondences among unit numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node Example Unit 04 Unit 05 Unit 06 Unit 07 Local Network Table Local network Unit number address LAA A Network 1 VAVA Network 2 y Network 3 Network 4 Note 1 The unit number is set 0 to F 1 to 15 by the rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit 2 The network address is the number of the network 1 to 127 to which the Communications Unit or Board is connected It is set when the local net work table is created Relay Network Table A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first in order to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node It shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination net work and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the path to reach there When internetwork communications are carr
126. ations for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions X X XX PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units 100Base TX The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Ethernet Units You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate an Ethernet Unit 1 Intended AUCICNCG sor rr setos is xxii 2 General Precautions nee dr xxii 3 Salety PrecauliOns eane id bd dui Bd ee ai adi xxii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 cee eee eee xxiii
127. ations with the SNTP server SMTP Server error e There is an error in the setting for the SMTP server host specification i e the IP address or the host name e A timeout was generated in communications with the SMTP server e The time for verification from the POP server elapsed when POP before SMTP was set POP Server Error e There is an error in the setting for the POP server host specification i e the IP address or the host name e An error occurred in the POP server verification i e a user name or password setting error e A timeout was generated in communications with the POP server 164 Command Response Reference Total Number of Packets Received Response Total Number of Receive Errors Response Total Number of Packets Sent Response Total Number of Errors Sent Response Total Number of Send Collisions Response Precautions Response Codes 7 3 4 Command Block Response Block Section 7 3 Address Disagreement The address conversion method was set for automatic generation but the node address and the last byte of the local IP address do not agree or other host sections are 0 EEPROM Error An error occurred in the EEPROM memory in the Ethernet Unit The total number of packets received by the Ethernet Unit is returned The total number of errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was receiving is returned The types of error detected are short packet errors alignment er
128. attached to the front of the Ethernet Unit to differentiate between Ethernet Units with different unit versions Unit Version Notation In this manual the unit version of a Ethernet Unit is given as shown in the fol lowing table Product nameplate Notation used in this manual Special remarks Ver 2 0 or later number Ethernet Unit Ver 1 3 or later Information without reference to specific Unit shown to right of the lot Versions applies to all versions of the Unit number Blank to the right of lot Pre Ver 1 3 Ethernet Units number vil TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIO NS rasos AXI 1 Intended AUGIONCE dnd E A A AAA Bee xxii 2 General Precautions er A AS RAS A EA xxii 3 Sale hy PreCALLONS esa e ARA A A N Ne A ici A xxii 4 Operating Environment Precautions ss rvecurad ias a A we EAE k xxiii 5 Application Precautions spraek 2066 a a A A id eG xxiii 6 Contormanceto EC DITECUVES 100 dr is id la eee Ba Be XXV SECTION 1 Features and System Configurati0N oooooooo o o pu al Ethernet mt Pune On Gude ride di e hacen 2 2 A te RU OEY EEE MEA bake aes BE eS ae Bee ok ee coe 8 Pe ae 8 128 SystemC ONMGUIUON hint enue ced Soe eae at ee ORO 11 ld CSPECIICAUONS s van ida ada AAA e a ae ee xe 14 1 5 Overview of Communications Functions oooooooooooo eees 17 Fo Nomenclature and PUnChONnS brit recede eae ee eee A 23 EF Comparison with Previous Model Saveiro ERAS 21 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Informal 28 SECTION 2 In
129. automatic clock adjust ment This setting does not normally need to be changed HTTP 3 10 HTTP HTTP Server Setup Note Section 3 10 Contents Default Retry Timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec 0 tion to the SNTP server fails This setting does not 10 s normally need to be changed Time Lag This sets in the CPU Unit s clock data the time differ Adjustment ence made up from the SNTP server s clock data To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it is input O For details refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters fx DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adjustment HTTP al gt HTTF Server Setting W Use WEB functions Password Port Ho 0 0 Default 80 TrenstefUrittoPC _TransfetPCto Uni Compare sosw estar SetDefauts Cancel Contents Use WEB a a Ee to use or prohibit the Web aE Web func tions function Deselect this option to pro tion is er hibit use of the Web function Password Sets the password for accessing None the Ethernet Unit s settings and sta ETHERNET is used tus monitoring information using a Web browser Sets the port No used to connect to O 80 is used the Web browser For details refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 1 The HTTP Server
130. ay the operating status of the Unit mm El E MH Oo Co ua 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST Unit Number Switch Used to set the Ethernet Unit s unit number in one digit hexadecimal hag A OSY X16 NEY x16 Node Number Switches Used to set the Ethernet Unit s FINS node number in two digits hexadecimal 100BASE TX 10BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet Connector Used to connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable Mounting Pin for DIN Track Used when mounting the Unit to DIN Track Slider For mounting to other Units Note An IP address label is provided with the Unit Writing the IP address and the subnet mask on this label and then attaching it to the front of the Unit allows the IP address and subnet mask to be easily confirmed 24 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 1 6 2 e Unit Version 1 5 or Later Unit Version 1 4 or Earlier Example IP ADDRESS 133 113 o UNIT SOS No No SUBNET MASK a NODE SR 255 255 255 0 E x16 on a H Attach the label to the front of the Ethernet Unit between the node number switches 133 113 0 42 133 113 0 42 SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE T ETN21 ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LINK RUN ERC SD RD LINK O O mues o HO Oo Oo Oo O O HO El Co Co Oo 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 0 42 Each communications dev
131. being used by another socket when there were no short buffers available All the above values are set to O if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup These values are cleared when the Ethernet Unit is started or reset Values will be counted only until the maximum values are reached 0000 Command too large 7 3 27 SOCKET STATUS READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Socket Status Response 198 Reads the Ethernet Unit network socket status 27 64 Command code 27 64 MN 32 bytes 32 bytes ds Command Response Socket status 7777777777777 Socket status code code Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes each A maximum of 62 records can be returned The format of each record is shown below Protocol 4 bytes The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number 00 00 00 06 TCP 00 00 00 11 UDP Receive Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the reception queue Send Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the send queue Local IP Address 4 bytes The local IP address allocated to the socket Local Port Number 4 bytes The local port number allocated to the socket Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Remote IP Address 4 bytes The remote IP address allocated to the socket Remote Port Number 4 bytes The remote port number allocated to the socket TCP Transitions 4 bytes The TCP connection status
132. ble Controllers Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the Ethernet Unit refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units Command code I O memory area 01 01 MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of consecutive I O access memory area words 01 02 MEMORY AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive I O memory area words 01 03 MEMORY AREA FILL Writes the same data to the specified range of I O memory area words 01 04 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of specified non consecutive I O memory area words 01 05 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Copies the contents of consecutive I O memory area words to another I O memory area Parameter area 02 01 PARAMETER AREA READ Reads the contents of consecutive access parameter area words 02 02 PARAMETER AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive parameter area words 02 03 PARAMETER AREA FILL CLEAR Writes the same data to the specified range of parameter area words Program area 03 06 PROGRAM AREA READ Reads the UM User Memory area a PROGRAM AREA WRITE Writes to the UM User Memory area 03 08 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Clears the UM User Memory area Operating mode 04 01 RUN Changes the CPU Unit s operating changes mode to RUN or MONITOR 04 02 STOP Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to PROGRAM Machine configura CPU UNIT DATA READ Reads CPU Unit data tion reading 05 02 CONNECTION DATA REA
133. c method or the IP address table method must be selected for IP address conversion When TCP is used changes in IP address and TCP port numbers are handled automatically e Multiple FINS applications CX Programmer and user created application programs at the same computer can be connected online to a PLC via Ethernet using either TCP IP or UDP IP 1 5 2 Socket Services Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits 18 The socket services allow devices on the Ethernet to send and receive vari ous data using either the UDP or TCP protocol One way to use socket services is to set the required parameters in the parameter area allocated in the DM Area and then to request particular UDP or TCP socket services by turning ON dedicated control bits in memory When the Ethernet Unit has completed the requested process the same bit is turned OFF to provide notification Data that is sent or received is automati cally handled according to the I O memory locations specified in the parame ter area There is no need to execute the CMND 490 instruction or to monitor the com pletion timing and actual processing of the instruction so this helps to simplify ladder programming A total of eight ports UDP and TCP combined can be used for socket ser vices Starting with unit version 1 5 the performance of sending and receiving has been improved by using the option settings UNIX computer etc node with socket services interface E
134. c address generation method Flash The Unit operation mode change function Set the node address correctly ing is in effect 8 2 Error Status The Ethernet Unit will output error status to the following word in the CIO Area of the CPU Unit This information can be used in troubleshooting errors Word CIO 1500 25 x unit number 18 Error Status Ethernet Unit The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the to CPU Unit following diagram 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 mes P f f f P Toff l l Bit 02 IP address setting error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error u E Manipulated by Unit operation CIC IO O aa A gt sae setting error Unit ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP address e All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1 e All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1 e All bits in the subnet ID are 1 e The IP address begins with 127 0x7F OFF Uni OFFwhenthe IP address is norma 3 IP adress table error m _ 205 Error Log Section 8 3 Bt Error Status Manipulated by Unit operation 5 DNS server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during DNS server operation e An illegal server IP address is set
135. cascade connections up to 5 segments can be connected using up to 4 repeaters i e 4 hubs MDI ports MDI X port A Straight cable cross A Hub Cross cable Q Ch O Hub Co to Hub Ue Hub mmm AAA AAA e Connect the hubs using special cables or special racks e Normally there is no limit to the number of hubs in a stack and each stack is treated as one hub Some hubs however are limited in the number of hubs per stack Hub Four stackable hubs Two stackable hubs oto f O 4 Zz Stack cable Stack cable C o DJ bp oo a oe oo oo oo Network Installation Section 2 4 2 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units Mounting Location Cable Location Communications errors can occur when Contact Output Units are mounted to the same Rack or connected to the same PLC as an Ethernet Unit due to noise generated by the contact outputs Use one or more of the following measures when installing Contact Output Units and Ethernet Units on the same Rack Mount or connect any Contact Output Units as far away from the Ethernet Unit as possible Contact Output Unit Ethernet Unit Transceiver Hub F z Contact outputs a Separate the transceiver cable or twisted pair cable connecting the Ethernet Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible The c
136. ception buffer after the receive request processing is complete the number of bytes is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket and the Data Received Flag turns ON again The status of this flag is checked before a receive request is executed Results Storage Error Flag Bit 14 Turns ON if there is an error in the Results Storage Area for a socket service request open receive send close made using CMND 490 This flag turns ON at the same time as the services request processing flags bits O to 3 turn OFF It remains ON until the next services request is received and then it turns OFF again When this flag turns ON check the set values in the Results Storage Area The Results Storage Error Flag does not operate when socket services are requested by control bit manipulation 81 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 TCP UDP Open Flag Bit 15 Remains ON while a socket is open by means of control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction In the case of TCP it indicates a connection When the socket is closed this flag turns OFF again If the socket did not close properly the flag remains ON Check to be sure that this flag is ON before executing a send or receive request Service Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 E ft ele er Setup Format FTP Status Accessing Memory Link Status Sending Mail Accessing Memory Receiving Mail A Ma
137. command to execute the PING command from the PLC Refer to page 184 for details on the PING command 2 10 3 Host Computer Method Note Application Examples Normal Execution The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an echo request packet to an Ethernet Unit The method for using the PING com mand from a UNIX computer is given next Input the following at the host computer prompt ping IP_address host_name The destination is specified by its IP address or host name If the host name is used the host name must be defined in file etc hosts The PING command is not supported by some host computers These examples show sending the PING command to the node at IP address 130 25 36 8 The in the example represents the host computer prompt User inputs are underlined Comments are placed after semicolons S ping 130 25 36 8 Executes PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms Enter Ctrl C Key to cancel 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss round trip ms min avg max 0 1 16 gt 53 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 Abnormal Execution S ping 130 25 36 8 Executes PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes lt Enter Ctrl C Key to cancel 130 25 36
138. cting through Multiple Segments Using Media with Unreliable Connections Such as a Wireless LAN Connecting from a Personal Computer with a Dynamic Private IP Address Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP FINS TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use lower versions of the CX Pro grammer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as per sonal computer middleware Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP FINS TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss resulting from unreliable connections For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use lower versions of the CX Programmer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as personal computer middleware Depending on whether or not the connection will be within the same segment either use an IP address conversion method for dynamic IP addresses in the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service or use the
139. cting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP Password Sets the password for connecting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP None CONFIDENTIAL 0 Port No Set the FTP port number for the Ethernet Unit There is normally no need to change this number Number 21 is Two ports are used for FTP a control port and a data transfer port This used setting sets only the control port and then the data transfer port uses the number that is one less than the control port High speed Socket Ser Selecting this option improves the performance of processing for send Disabled vices ing and receiving using specific bits for socket services For information on communications performance refer to 6 9 5 Times Required for Sending and Receiving for Socket Services in the Ethernet Units Con struction of Applications Operation Manual When the High Speed Option is selected socket services that are implemented using a CMND 490 instruction will cause an error Note 1 The setting to enable or disable dynamic changing of remote IP address es is available for Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later 2 Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX Programmer to be included in version 5 0 and higher or using the Web function refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 3 The Enable CIDR Option and High Speed Option for performance of socket service are supported starting with unit version 1 5 63 FINS TCP Section 3 2 3
140. d 1 984 The Command Results results storage area stores the actual number of bytes sent Storage Area Data Sent Command Specifies the data to be sent Response Codes 1003 The number of bytes sent does not match the amount of data 1100 The TCP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of range 182 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 0020 Connection to the remote socket was broken during transmis sion EPIPE 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 0042 see note An error occurred EMSGSIZE 0044 see note Received ICMP data ENOPROTOOPT 0045 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENETUNREACH 004F see note Received ICMP data EHOSTDOWN 0051 see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOSTUNREACH 0053 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT 0081 The specified socket was closed dur
141. d Firewalls Setting a global IP address for an Ethernet Unit involves network security con siderations It is recommended that the user contract with a communications company for a dedicated line rather than using a general line such as a blue band Also be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider security measures such as a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications company 113 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 114 SECTION 6 FINS Communications This section provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to Ethernet Units FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions programmed into the user ladder diagram program Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section refer to the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W340 for further details on programming these instructions 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications 0 000 eee eee 116 6 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network 116 6 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods 116 6 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Etherne
142. d Flag 8 80 dedicated control bits 18 DHCP client 9 dimensions 15 CJ series 14 CS series 14 DM Area 138 allocations 86 DNS client 22 DNS client function 10 DNS communications 16 DNS server 10 22 DNS Tab 51 66 Driver Tab 128 E EC Directives xxv echo response packet 52 electromagnetic fields xxiii EM Area 138 EM File Memory 7 E mail attaching files 9 mail receive function 6 9 21 mail send function 5 20 receiving at PLC 6 sending data 5 sending equipment status 5 EMC Directives xxv EMI Standard xxv EMS Standard xxv ERC indicator 26 troubleshooting 204 ERH indicator 26 troubleshooting 204 ERROR LOG CLEAR 168 ERROR LOG READ 167 ErrorLogClear command 6 73 ErrorLogRead command 6 73 errors alignment 165 controller status 163 error codes 207 error log 206 clearing 168 reading 167 error status 205 flags FINS communications 164 response codes 227 short packets 165 status 83 205 unit numbers 91 UNIX error messages 231 Ethernet communications 16 addresses reading from Unit 162 exchanging data between PLCs 4 parameters 235 Ethernet Connector 23 38 Ethernet Unit Setup 41 Ethernet Units mounting 33 reading status 196 replacing 243 resetting 161 ETN condition field 71 ETN11 mode 54 converting from ETN21 mode 59 converting to ETN21 mode 58 ETN21 mode converting from ETN11 mode 58 converting to ETN11 mode 59 F FileDe
143. d be selected to be used e P addresses protection setting Note Check this only for protection as the server y Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC y Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 123 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 6 4 Creating Routing Tables When the FINS communications service is used routing tables must be cre ated in advance Routing tables are required in the following circumstances e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communic
144. d may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof xviii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICA TIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specific
145. d when the Unit is turned ON or restarted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP 99 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Combined Method 100 Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table FINS node mba IP address Node number in 18 153 214 0 62 IP address table 20 153 214 0 129 gt IP address 153 214 0 129 93 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent When FINS Command is Received FINS node number Node number not Internal table in IP address table ene 25 153 218 51 10 IP address 153 218 51 10 Changed eS FINS response returned The combined method combines the IP address table method and the auto matic generation method dynamic First the IP address table is referenced Then if the applicable FINS node address is found the corresponding IP address is read If the FINS node address is not found the IP address is calculated using the automatic genera tion method dynamic The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Co
146. ddress Display Area and the local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup will be read and stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to 0 0 0 0 the default setting this value is read by the Ethernet Unit when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted and is used as the local IP address Note Choose the method used to set the local IP address as follows Set the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup when making other settings in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup The settings are made with CX Programmer Set the local IP address in the allocated words in the DM Area when using the CPU Bus Unit System Setup at its default settings i e for simple operation The setting is usually made with a Programming Console Application Setting device Settingarea Remarks Simple operation i e The CPU Programming Con Allocated words in The setting in the allocated words in Unit Bus System Setup is used at sole CX Program the DM Area the DM Area is enabled only when the its default settings Only the IP mer can also be IP address in the CPU Unit Bus Sys address is set used tem Setup is set to 0 0 0 0 If the IP address in the CPU Unit Bus System Setup is set to a value other than 00 00 00 00 this value is stored in the allocated words in the DM Area Operation with the CPU Unit Bus CX Programmer CPU Unit Bus Sys The IP add
147. dicator will begin to flash Node address indicators A RON ENS Set the rotary switches for the node address to OF The Unit mode change function will start and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five seconds Node address Indicators xtet 16 AUN ERC ERE O0 F Flashing Lit Flashing _ After the mode has been changed the indicators will appear as shown be low depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an er ror occurred 59 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 e If the Mode Change was Completed Normally Node address Indicators ade 60 RUN ERG ERR o F Flashing e If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change Mode address Indicators EEC IE o F Feno ut mon Note If an error occurs in the mode change remove the Ethernet Unit create the I O tables and correct the settings using the procedures described in this section 7 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address to its original setting 8 Turn ON the power to the PLC Mode address Indicators ESTO ESTAN IE Ea o O m non non 60 SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup This section describes how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation A ON 62 3 AIN ER aaa ASA 64 Be ON SAA AE 66 B24 AA A 67 Be MUERE NS rail 68 320 Mal Addenda ii aaa
148. ding on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Note Applicable EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility and EMI Electromagnetic Interference Standards in the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility stan dards are as follows Unit Board CS1W ETN21 EN61000 6 2 EN61000 6 4 CJ1W ETN214 Radiated emission 10 m regulations XXV Conformance to EC Directives 6 Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC and 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC EN61131 2 XXV SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration This section introduces the features describes the system configuration and Unit parts and provides Unit specifications 1 1 Ethernet Unit Function Guide 2 0 cm 2 1 1 1 Overall System Configuration Example 2 12 Determining the Objectives sucia A ee ee 2 lez Fea adas An A a a a 8 ES System CONMPULANON arrieros dd 11 3 2 System Configuration daras sc a E 11 1 32 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 11 1 3 3 Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices 12 LA SSPeCCi Cau ONS e A AA AA 14 1 4 1 General Specifications ainia ads 14 Peasy DIMENSIONS gt causa dr dd e
149. dress Mail Send MailReceive Clock Auto Adjustment HTT 4 SHTF Server Setting Obtain clock data from SNTP Server m E jo a 0 Hires a pe WEE SSS nnn 0 Default 123 sec 0 Default 10 them 1200 to 1200 AAA A re Cancel ENCINA a Obtain clock data from SNTP server Auto Adjustment Designation Method IP Address 74 If this option is selected the CPU Unit s clock is set to the time at the SNTP server s clock The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to which the Ethernet Unit is mounted Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be accessed to synchronize the clocks When the time that is set here arrives the SNTP server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is adjusted to match the SNTP server clock Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or by host domain name i e by host name Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by IP address has been selected Not checked IP Address 0 0 0 0 None 0 Number 123 is used Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by host name has been selected Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP server that is to be used for
150. dresses are exchanged immediately after a connection is established This makes it possible to determine the FINS node addresses to which the 16 connection numbers and to manage them in an internal table Personal computer Ethernet Unit Client Server Example Example IP address C IP address S FINS node number A FINS node number B a a a a OOO ser Remote node No received Local node No sent Remote node No received Passive open Connection request CS Connection established FINS node numbers exchanged nt FINS node number B se oci node No seni FINS frame sent Jero eee FINS frame sent ve Full duplex communications re i Normal data communications v v 122 After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP server it is termi nated in the following ways e When the connection is closed by the client e When a FINS command to close the connection FINS TCP CONNEC TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST is sent by the client e When there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP client it can be termi nated in the following ways e If the connection is closed by the server e If there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect FINS TCP Method Note Section 6 3 Even if the connection is closed at the FINS TCP client requests con
151. e The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network with 100Base TX type CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units so prepare them in advance Network devies 1 CS series Ethernet These Ethernet Units are Communications Units that Units CS1W ETN21 connect a CS series or CJ series PLC to 100Base TX or CJ series Ethernet Ethernet networks They can also be used as 10Base T Units CJ1W ETN21 2 Twisted pair cable This is twisted pair cable for connecting 100Base TX type Ethernet Units to the hub with an RJ45 Modular Connec tor at each end Use a category 3 4 5 or 5e UTP unshielded twisted pair or STP shielded twisted pair cable This is a relay device for connecting multiple nodes in a star LAN Recommended Hubs For details on recommended devices for constructing a network refer to 2 4 Network Installation 11 System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 3 Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices Making Settings in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area with the CX Programmer Making Settings in the Routing Table Area with CX Integrator Middleware for FINS Communications Applications on a Personal Computer FinsGateway 12 For the Ethernet Unit to function as a node on an Ethernet network make the settings as required in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area allocated in non volatile memory in the CPU Unit Use the CX Programmer to make the settings by connec
152. e CX Integrator refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 CX Integrator is automatically installed when CX One is installed Note 1 When routing tables are transferred from the CX Integrator to the PLC the CPU Bus Unit is reset so that the routing tables that have been created can be read and enabled Before transferring the routing tables make sure that the devices in the system will not be adversely affected by resetting the CPU Bus Unit To transfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch connect the CX Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with mul tiple Communications Units mounted Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within the same network as the PLC to which the CX Integrator is connected 125 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 6 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples m Example 1 Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multi ple CPU Bus Units are mounted Ethernet network Controller Link network Network A Network B Unit a Unit b PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit ETN Ethernet Unit CLK Controller Link Unit Local Network Table No Local CPU Bus network Unit m Example 2 Three Interconnected Networks This example shows the relay net
153. e ETN11 compatible mode is set as follows using the Web function setting window 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit from a Web browser and select Settings 1 IP address and Protocols System The System Format will be displayed 2 Select ETN11 compatible mode from the FINS UDP option in the System Format click the Set Button click the Regist Button and then turn the pow er supply OFF and ON or restart the Unit using a software restart 1 If the ETN11 compatible mode is used internal method tables will not be changed when the power supply is turned OFF and ON or software resets are executed This provides protection from access via FINS UDP from computers that dynamically change their IP address 2 The ETN11 compatible mode is not used for normal applications and should not be used in most cases IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 FINS TCP Communications Method Pairing in the FINS TCP Method Note Internal Processing 1 23 1 2 3 With the FINS TCP method communications are first established for each connection and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted See note Then FINS message communications are executed In this way remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired for each connection Therefore with the FINS TCP method there is no need to set IP address conversions i e pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses as with FINS UDP All that is required is t
154. e Ethernet Unit 0 0 0 0 FINS node address 192 168 250 Set the subnet mask for the Ethernet Unit 0 0 0 0 This is required if a method other than the IP address table method is default subnet used for address conversion mask for IP address setting Set the specifications for the subnet mask Disabled e Disabled Set for the range of class A class B and class C e Enabled Classless setting range 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 Specify the local UDP port number to be used for the FINS communica 9 600 tions service The UDP port number is the number used for UDP identi fication of the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case e Default 9 600 e User defined Setting range 1 to 65 535 Note Make the settings so that UDP port number 123 for SNTP does not overlap with UDP port number 53 for DNS Specify the local TCP port number to be used for the FINS communica 9 600 tions service The TCP port number is the number used for TCP identifi cation of the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case e Default 9 600 e User defined Setting range 1 to 65 535 Note Make the settings so that TCP port numbers 20 and 21 for the FTP server TCP port number 25 for SMTP TCP port number 110 for POP3 and TCP port number 53 for DNS do not overlap Setup Section 3 1 tem Defaul Conversion Select any of the following as the method for finding and converting IP
155. e Function in the Operation Man ual Construction of Applications Mail Address Section 3 6 3 6 Mail Address CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters J Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP Pop Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adjustme 4 Destination Mail Address Mail Address Mail Address LirensfefUrittoPt _TrensfetPCto Unit Compare sotsw_ estat SetDefauts Cancel Destination Mail Address Setup Mem Comente SC faut Mail Address 1 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit is to send mail Up to two address can be set Note Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by punctuating the mail address with commas Mail Address 2 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit is to send mail Up to two address can be set Note Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by punctuating the mail address with commas For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 69 70 Send Mail Section 3 7 3 7 Send Mail C51W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters ag Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP MailAddress Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adjustme 4 Send Trigger T E E 5 Use send trigger Area Address Brea Address vima Sta User s mail data address podp a 3 n Area Address Bit S tatu a a da pS p o 3 Area Address Size e 0 memory data
156. e below The Variable type is set in the first byte of the results storage area The remaining three bytes contain the address for communications Addresses in the Addresses for communications column are not the same as the actual memory addresses communications type BitAreas Current CIO CIO 000010 CIO Sta 00000010 17FF00 B0 607 2 ma DM Area EM Area Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 3 Bank 5 Bank 6 a Bank 7 A7 97 Bank 9 A Bank B AB Bank C AC Current bank Note The variable types area designations given in parentheses can also be used allowing CV series or CVM1 programs to be more easily corrected for use with CS CJ series PLCs Word and Bit Addresses Three bytes of data are used to express data memory addresses of PLCs The most significant two bytes give the word address and the least significant byte gives the bit number between 00 and 15 The word address combined with the bit number expresses the bit address The bit number is always 00 because Ethernet Units can handle only word data e individual bits cannot be addressed L Specifies the bit position between 00 and OF 0 to 15 for bit data Specifies the address of the corresponding word Variable type Word addresses for specific memory area words can be calculated by con verting the normal decimal word address to hexadecimal and adding it to the first word in the Addresses for communications column in the above table For example the address for commun
157. e destination mail address is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings e f POP before SMTP is required for the SMTP server connection SMTP POP before SMTP and POP must be set in the Unit Setup There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 0 0 0 0 e The mail transmission settings in the Unit Setup are wrong not set There is a mistake in the send conditions in the Unit Setup s mail transmission settings Correct the mistake e The Mail Send Switch never turns ON after a start power ON or restart e The interval timer is not set or is set to an interval longer than intended e The send conditions are not set Correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings The mail address set in the Unit Setup is wrong Correct the mistake Note Set the destination mail address correctly If it is incorrect mail will stay at the SMTP server Correct the information in the mail transmission settings in the Unit Setup e Make the settings for the required user data error log data status data and file attachments Clear the following errors e If a us
158. e errors occur only in large multilayered networks 179 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 15 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST Requests that data be sent from a TCP socket y Command Results storage area Number of Timeout code reception bytes value TCP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Command Block Response Block Results Storage Format o eS Response Number of Received data code reception bytes Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O TCP Socket Number The TCP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command Results Storage Area The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first Command byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Number of Reception The maximum number of bytes of data to be received is given in the com Bytes Command Results mand The number of bytes of data received will be stored in the results stor Storage Area age area Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified Timeout Value The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing Command the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will
159. e from the IP address the host name used for DNS service can be specified for the SNTP server Reference SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 1 2 Features Compatibility and Speed The transmission medium has been upgraded to 100Base TX while compati bility with the functions and application interfaces of the existing Ethernet Unit models CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 has been main tained Moreover processing speed has been improved so that the system response performance for the same FINS message applications is now up to four times faster Various Protocols Available on Ethernet A variety of protocols makes available a wide range of applications for use on an Ethernet network The protocols that can be selected include sending and receiving data by TCP IP or UDP IP socket services sending and receiving commands by OMRON s standard protocol FINS transferring files by FTP sending and receiving e mail by SMTP POP3 and automatically adjusting the PLC s internal clock by SNTP A communications service can be selected according to need allowing the PLC to be flexibly integrated with the Ethernet information network Communications by UDP IP and TCP IP Socket Services Function The standard Ethernet protocols UDP IP and TCP IP are supported making it possible to communicate with a wide range of devices workstations com puters and Ethernet Units from ot
160. e is required CX Programmer CX Integrator Programming Console etc The CX Integrator is required The CX Programmer is required af ON 30 Switch Settings Section 2 2 2 2 Switch Settings 2 2 1 CS series Ethernet Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 Setting range 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs words are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations Setting the Node Address Note Relation to IP Addresses Unit Operating Mode Change Function With the FINS communications service when there are multiple Ethernet Units connected to the Ethernet network the Ethernet Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches NODE NO to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network Setting range 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch se
161. e network or cor rect the routing tables so that commands are sent to within a 3 level network range Check the command format and set the correct command data Check the command format and set the correct command data Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Check for nodes sending illegal packets Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Check the routing tables Set the remote node in the IP address table Select the IP address table or both methods for the address con version method Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Reduce the size of events Saved Error Log Section 8 3 Detailed error code Correction 1st byte 2nd byte Parameter error packet discarded Commands Check the command format and Bit 15 set the correct command data Bits 08 to 14 Bits 00 to 07 Responses Bit 15 Bits 08 to 14 Bits 00 to 07 FINS TCP setting error 01to10 01 Automati Refer to 1 5 1 FINS Communica Connection _ cally allo tions Service in this manual and number cated FINS ithe Operation Manual Construc node address tion of Applications SECTION 7 duplication and set the FINS TCP settings 02 Destina Correctly tion IP address error 03 Destina tion port number error Server setting error 00 DNS 01 IP Set the server settings correctly 01 SMTP address based on the information in the 02 POP3 02 Host detailed error code
162. e overall packet length value in the packet header 7 The number of fragmented packets received 8 The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a queue for reassembly could not be secured 9 The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not be reassembled within 12 seconds after being received 10 Always 0 11 The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been dis carded 12 Always 0 Note Refer to 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ for details on the short buffer ICMP Status Response Ten types 46 items of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexa decimal value 1 2 AA 1 The number of times the ICMP error routine was called The ICMP error routine uses ICMP packets to inform the source about errors The routine is called when an illegal packet is received error in IP option processing or error in relay processing or if the object port does not exist when using UDP 2 Always 0 3 Always 0 4 Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output The 19 Statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are de fined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Only 0 3 14 16 and 18 are counted by the Ethernet Unit Type number Description 193 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 TCP Status Response 194 1 2 3 5 The number
163. e remote node IP status 2 3 5 6 All communications services ICMP status 5 6 7 8 ping TCP status UDP status e f the following parameters are counted the load at the Ethernet Unit may be too high Adjust the user applications IP status 4 8 9 3 reception status 4 5 6 FTP TCP sockets 1 2 3 FINS communications UDP socket Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Mail Not being Sent The mail transmission function cannot be used because no IP Y address or host name is set for the SMTP server Using the CX Programmer make the SMTP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too Is the HOST indicator lit Is the SMTP POPS or DNS error statu bit ON2 Is the HOST indicator flashing 224 Is the user mail transmission status 7 Is the user mail transmission status 0 Is the user mail transmission status 6 Does destination mail address exist Is required Information missing from the mail Did required mail content fail to be obtained E N D Is the ERH indicator There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or 127 e The SMTP server host name is wrong e The local mail address is wrong e Th
164. e values saved in the CPU Units flash memory non volatile memory 8 To enable the unit settings that have been registered in the CPU Units flash memory non volatile memory turn the power to the PLC OFF and ON again or restart the Ethernet Unit 2 8 Basic Settings 46 The following items comprise the basic settings in the Ethernet Unit 100Base TX setup Each item is described in detail below e P address e Subnet mask e Broadcast settings e Baud rate e TCP IP keep alive e IP router table E IP Address For the IP address set the Ethernet Unit s local IP address Basic Settings Section 2 8 Depending on the value that is set the IP address has a great influence on the connectability of the Ethernet Unit To make full use of the Ethernet func tions it is necessary to study the applications and network system design when determining IP address allocations Before setting the IP address refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses There are several ways to set IP addresses Default Setting The Ethernet Unit operates using the default IP address when the Unit is mounted to the PLC and initially registered in the I O tables i e when the Unit settings have not been made and the IP Address Display Setting in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area is still all Zeros The default IP address is determined as follows Default IP address 192 168 250 FINS node address The FINS node address is set by the rotar
165. ed CJ1W SCU21 V1 41 V1 Serial Communica to the Serial Communications Board or Unit tions Units Operation Describes the use of Serial Communications Units and Manual Boards including details on hardware software and standard system protocols N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given XV XVI Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESP
166. edgement _ _ An acknowledgement is received whenever a connection is established or data is sent so transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower Compared to the FINS UDP method the FINS TCP method has the following characteristics e Data transmission is more reliable due to factors such as retry process ing at the TCP IP layer The FINS TCP method is thus better suited to dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several layers e Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server i e the server can be protected from access by non specified IP addresses e Broadcasting cannot be used e TCP IP has various retry procedures and this tends to lower its perfor mance in comparison with UDP IP e There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made i e 16 connections maximum and any given node can communicate only with up to 16 other nodes at a time 120 FINS TCP Method FINS TCP Frame Format Section 6 3 e Once a FINS TCP connection connection number remote IP address has been set in the Unit Setup it can be dynamically changed from the ladder program using a FINS command i e FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 CP TCP FINS TCP header FINS frame FCS TCP Port Number for FINS TCP FINS TCP Connect
167. edure for Creating I O Tables oooooooo 40 2d NUMESctup Procedure sic a eS Seas OS E RET 41 27 6 Usine the CX Prosraminer seerste AA EAA 41 2 7 2 Using the Web Browser Setting Functi0M 43 228 BASICOS ic abi 46 2 9 Unit Setup for Particular Applications o ooooooooo 00 cece eee 50 2280 Communications Test scada asada 52 2102 PING Command ideada 52 PAOD Bene UN east al ate Mice r AE J3 IO y Tos COMpULel SA a ee eee 53 2 11 Converting from Previous Models 0 0 0 eee eee 54 29 Overview of Startup Procedure Section 2 1 2 1 Overview of Startup Procedure The following procedure is the same for the CS Series and CJ Series Determine the local IP address Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses and address conversion method Set the unit number Refer to 2 2 Switch Settings Set the node number Refer to 2 2 Switch Settings Mount the Unit to the PLC Refer to 2 3 Mounting to a PLC Connect to the network using twisted pair cable Refer to 2 4 Network Installation Turn ON power to the CPU Unit Create the I O tables Refer to 2 6 Creating I O Tables See note 3 Setting only the IP address not making other Unit settings for simple application or operating Connecting to the Ethernet Unit Setting system settings freely setting possible with CX Programmer or Web function without making any settings ith only the Programming Console s
168. elete unneeded files or use a different Memory Card execute put Return to Startup Problems s the data in the file transferred with put or get normal i e not corrupted Y Use the type command and change the file data type to binary before executing put or get END 222 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 6 Network Connection Problems Network connection problem occurred Go through the procedure in Startup Problems before starting this procedure Is the LNK indicator lit Execute the ping command for all nodes connected to the network Did all nodes fail to respond to ping command Did a particular node fail to respond to ping command Is the remote node functioning as an FTP client Execute FINS PROTOCOL STATUS READ E N D Cable e Firmly secure the cable Is the twisted pair cable secured e Use straight cable Is the twisted pair between the Ethemet Uni and the hub straight cable e Replace first the twisted pair cable then the hub and then the Ethernet Unit in order nly SD a e Power may not be being supplied to the hub flashing e The twisted pair cable for that node may be disconnected e The remote node may not support ICMP e Connect by FTP e f the following parameters are counted the corresponding communications services may not be possible with th
169. em O o Cones Deam Protect by mail If this option is selected mail from sources Not checked address other than specified addresses is denied Use the Mail address text box below to spec ify the sources from which to receive mail Source mail Set the mail address if the option has been checked to protect using mail address Mail will not be accepted from sources other than the mail address set here 72 Receive Mail Section 3 8 Receive Attached File Setting Contents Default Receive a specified _ If this option is selected only file attachments Not extension file only with specified extensions is accepted with mail checked Use the checkboxes below to select which file extensions are to be accepted Multiple exten sions can be selected OBJ If this option is selected an OBJ file which can Checked be created using the CX Programmer contain ing all cyclic task and interrupt task programs in the CPU Unit will be received STD If this option is selected an STD file containing the PLC Setup registered l O tables routing tables Unit Setups etc which can be read from the CPU Unit using the CX Programmer will be received If this option is selected an IOM file containing bit data from beginning to end of a memory area which can be created using the CX Pro grammer will be received If this option is selected CSV files created by programs such as Excel can be received If this opti
170. em Settings The socket is not open because of the remote node conversion command for the FINS TCP connection The socket is reopening because the connection to the remote node has closed The socket is reopening because of a reception error The socket is reopening because of a transmission error The socket is reopening because RST received in response to keep alive The socket is reopening because of no keep alive response Section 8 4 Remedy Use the socket status flag in PC memory to be sure that socket service has finished before start ing services again Open the socket For TCP sock ets be sure to wait until connec tion is made Correct the user application to Unit Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Disable the high speed option or if it remains enabled use the socket service by manipulating specific bits Check the IP address and subnet mask in the System Setup and be sure that settings are correct Check the mode settings in the System Setup This error
171. en if the host computer s IP address is dynamic DHCP client computers can be handled including TCP IP and UDP IP gt Previously IP addresses for host computers could be fixed only gt For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later the Unit can be protected against access from nodes with dynamically changed IP addresses set to be fixed only An automatic client FINS node address allocation function now makes it possible to connect online to the PLC even if no FINS node address has been set for the host computer Previously online connection to the PLC was possible only after a FINS node address was set for the host computer FINS message communications are now enabled in TCP IP with up to 16 simultaneous connections so a system can now utilize FINS message communications in both UDP IP and TCP IP Previously only UDP IP could be used Multiple FINS applications such as the CX Programmer on the same computer can now be connected online to the PLC via Ethernet in either TCP IP or UDP IP Previously when one FINS application on a computer was connected online to the PLC it was impossible to connect any other at the same time Transferring Data Files between Host Computers FTP Server Function A built in FTP server function enables data files in the PLC to be read from a workstation or computer with an FTP client function and for data to be written to the PLC Large amounts of data can be transferred at a time
172. ends normally A response will be returned only if an error occurs In some cases send requests SEND 192 RECV 193 instructions made from the PLC to the Ethernet Unit just before execution of the RESET com mand may not be executed Except for the FINS communications service sockets all open sockets for sockets services FTP server or mail transmission are closed immediately before resetting Response code Description 1001 Command too large 161 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following data from the Ethernet model version IP address sub net mask FINS UDP port number mode settings Ethernet address 05 01 y Command code Command Block Response Block Command Response Model Version IP address Subnet FINS UDP Mode Ethernet address code code mask port number setting Parameters Model Version The Ethernet Unit mode and version are returned as ASCII characters occu Response pying 20 bytes each i e 20 characters each If all bytes are not used the remaining bytes will be all soaces ASCII 20 Hex Example Model CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Version V1 50 IP Address Subnet Mask The Ethernet Unit s IP address and subnet mask are returned as 4 bytes Response each FINS UDP Port Number The Ethernet Unit s UDP port number for FINS is returned as 2 bytes Response Mode Setting Response The mode setting in the system setup is returned 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
173. er created mail address is wrong then correct it e There may be too much of a load traffic at the Ethernet Unit Adjust the applications Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Mail Not being Received Is the HOST indicator lit Is the SMTP Is the HOST indicator Y POP3 or Y flashing DNS error status bit ON Is the ERH indicator flashing Are there response lt lo remote mail commands Is the user mail transmission status 9 E N D The mail reception function and response mail transmission cannot be used because no IP address or host name is set for the POP3 SMTP server Using the CX Programmer make the SMTP and POP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or 127 e The SMTP server host name is wrong e The local mail address is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings e The POPS server and account information user name password mail address do not match Correct the communications path e Are the mailer settings correct e Are the settings c
174. eration will continue The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A427 Bit A402 07 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU and CPU Bus Units The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The Unit where the error occurred will stop The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A422 When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag A401 15 is turned ON and one of the follow ing flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A403 00 User program A403 04 PLC Setup A403 05 Registered I O Tables A403 07 Routing Table A403 08 CPU Bus Unit Settings The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop The Duplication Error Flag A401 13 and the corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit s unit number has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers O to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop Section 4 3 Settings 0 Network communi cations running 1 No network com munications running 0000 No error Not 0000 Error code 0 Normal end 1 Error end 0 Not initializing 1 Initializing System will automatically turn the flag OFF when ini tialization has been completed 0 No setting error 1 Setting error 0
175. error 00 DNS 01 Specified Take either of the following mea 01 SMTP host does not sures 02 POP3 exist e Correct the settings for each 02 No ser server ai vice at speci e Inspect the communications path fied host Ethernet Unit cable connec 03 Timeout tions hub router server and 04 Closed correct the situation that is caus unilaterally by ing the error host 05 Cannot connect because account infor mation does not match 06 Host name resolu tion error 07 Transmis sion error 08 Recep tion error 09 Other error 03C5 Mail communications error F101 Mail too large Refer to the Operation Manual F102 Mail received from Construction of Applications Cre non specified address ating FINS Applications and cor F103 Mail subiect rect the remote node i e the HA yogi application on the personal com F104 Non specified com outer mand received F106 Mail format header error F107 Mail format body error F201 Parameter error F301 Decoding error F302 File attachment error filename error data format error I O memory write size error F303 No attached file F304 Non specified file attachment received F305 File attachment too large Other FINS error response code 03C6 Clock data write error 0001 Clock data could not Clear the CPU Unit error be refreshed because of a CPU Unit error 0002 Clock data could not Refer to the Operation Manual be refreshed because the CPU Unit cou
176. ervice Status FTP Service etc n 18 Error Status All error conditions __ ER n 19 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit Socket Services quest Switches 2 quest Switches 1 Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications n 20 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re SECTION 6 quest Switches 4 quest Switches 3 n 21 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re quest Switches 6 quest Switches 5 n 22 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re quest Switches 8 quest Switches 7 y n 23 FINS TCP Connection Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit FINS Communications y n 24 Not used Refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications The following items in the diagram can also be checked using software switch settings on the CX Programmer e The status of UDP TCP sockets 1 to 8 Opening Flag Receiving Flag Sending Flag Closing Flag Results Storage Error Flag Socket Open Flag e Service status FTP status e FINS TCP Connection Status For explanations of how to use the related communications services listed in the above diagram refer to the indicated sections 78 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Unit Control Bits ee Unit to Ethernet Unit 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Socket Force close Switch Mail Send Switch Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch by 0010 01 Notused lt n close ON User All sockets are E ER closed when ae Manual Con Switch this bit turns ON struction of
177. et the following subnet mask values will be used depending on the class of the local IP address Subnet mask value cask 38000 255 255 255 0 If classes are normally used it is recommended to set subnet mask values corresponding to the class Starting with unit version 1 5 it is possible to use CIDR by selecting the CIDR option CIDR stands for classless inter domain routing which allows allocat ing IP addresses without using classes An IP address that uses a class has the disadvantage of inefficient allocation of IP address space i e number of hosts because the IP address is divided into block units with a network ID 95 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 component and host ID component Because CIDR does not use a class it is possible to divide the IP address space as desired which enables efficient use of IP address space i e number of hosts For example it is possible to build a horizontally distributed network exceeding 254 nodes by setting a net work mask using CIDR even if class C 192 168 is used Subnet mask range 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network IP addresses UDP port numbers and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node addresses to specify nodes on the network A Rese name J Transport level UDP OEA TCP TCP port number
178. etting possible with CX Programmer or Programming Console See note 2 See note 1 Refer to IP Use the default IP address Set local IP address in DM Area Set the local IP address in the Address in 2 8 words allocated for CPU Unit Units CPU Bus Unit setup area Basic Settings Refer to IP Address in 2 8 Basic Settings Refer to IP Address in 2 8 Basic Settings Refer to 4 2 DM Area Allocations g Create the routing tables Tables e Using the FINS communications service pr e cenas Refer to 6 4 Creating Routing Routing tables must be set to enable the following ee hy on ene y AAA EROS ee nole 4 e Using the CMND instruction with more than one Communications Unit mounted to the PLC Refer to SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup Refer to IP Address in 2 8 Basic Settings Perform Unit setup Create IP router tables a a a AN See note 5 ne stone Refer to 2 9 Unit Setup for Particular Applications PING command and or echo test Note 1 Used mainly when a Programming Console is used to set only the local IP address set in allocated DM words When using this method always leave the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area set to the default value of 0 0 0 0 If the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area contains any other value any setting made in the allocated DM words will be overwritten with it The local IP address and other parameters can be set with the CX Programmer APLC Programming Devic
179. ettings can be used with the automatic generation method Models Supporting IP Address Table Method version S tebie method Version table method CS series Ethernet Yes on CJ series Ethernet Uni CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 Ethernet Unit FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Version 2003 or higher Programmable Terminal No Set manually FINS Open Network Controller ONC communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP Models that Can Use the Combined Method oso rd Pathog Version method OS series Ethernet mi ll 1OBASE T CJWETNA CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 No Ethernet Unit FinsGateway Version 4 xx or No lower Version 2003 or higher 107 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 Product Model Series Supports combined Version method Programmable Terminal No Set manually FINS Open Network Controller ONC communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node addresses and the relation between fixed and variable address for both FINS UDP and FINS TCP Communi Method of pairing IP address determination Client personal Server PLC cations of IP addresses computer of PLC method and FINS node FINS node IP address FINS node IP address addresses address add
180. f the Units begins and turn OFF when it is completed 91 Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 3 92 SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses This section explains how to manage and use IP addresses Ss APAQdessES iain is eS eta teh ea Bok be Sek s 94 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration 0 0 0 00 cece eee ees 94 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses ecu oid dna RNG aa aia 94 5 1 3 Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings ooooooooooooooo 95 Soke Subnet MASKS ariera nET EEA NTEN TA E A E 95 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 0 0 00 ee eee eee 96 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services 96 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables ooooo o 98 5 2 3 Application Examplesia cosida Ads 105 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods 106 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses 108 5 3 Private and Global Addresses oooooooococornrrrooo mmm 108 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses oo o ooooooooommmoooo 108 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit 110 5 3 3 Ethernet Unit with a Global Address o oooooo o 112 93 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 IP Addresses Ethernet networks use IP addresses for communications IP addresses iden tify both the Ethernet network and the node host computer Ethernet Unit etc IP addresses must be set and controlled so that they are
181. finishing Is the response N Is the number of code in the results storage bytes received in the area a value other results storage than 0000 area 0 Y Is the remote node not processing to send data Adjust the remote node to process send data Read memory status using the FINS command READ MEMORY STATUS There may be too much load on the Ethernet Y Unit If the memory exhaustion records show counts processing may be slow Check your applications Is the network memory being used ore than 80 The remote node s TCP socket has closed y Close the local socket Return to the procedure for general problems Transmission Problems general problems 220 Transmission problem occurred Return to the procedure for s send processing Read socket status using finishing the FINS command READ SOCKET STATUS Is there the maximum number of bytes in the send queue 4 096 bytes Y _ Make sure that reception processing is being performed at the remote node Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 5 FTP Service Problems Connection Problems Connection problem occurred Are you unable to connect to the Ethernet Unit s FTP server Is the FTP indicator lit Are the parameter settings in the host computer incorrect Are you unable to log in Memory Card What type of Memory Card is it EM File
182. formation Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Send status information Send file data IO memory data Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Send file data IO memory data File data Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab File data IO data IOM Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab O data IOM IO data TXT Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab O data TXT IO data CSV Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab O data CSV File name Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab Attached file name Area Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab O memory data N 48 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G Menu item Corresponding CX Programmer function Mail Address Protection Setting Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Protect using mail address Attached File Enable Settings Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Receive file with specified extension only Command Enable Setting Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Receive specified commands only Status Monitor Menuitem Corresponding CX Programmer function ET PA FINS 0501 CONTROLLER DATA READ FINS 0601 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Protocol status ICMP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ ICMP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ TCP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ UDP status Mallog RECEIVE MAIL READ MALLOS FINS 2102 READ ERROR LOG Send mail status Mail send status 1 to 8 Web Function Password To prevent unauthorized access to the Ethernet Unit from
183. formation on ETN11 compatible mode Page 123 Added note Page 243 Changed and added new parameter item 261 Revision History Revision code Date Revised content 04 January 2006 The following changes were made throughout the manual added CJ1G CPULILIP changed CX Net to CX Integrator and changed CX Programmer to CX One Page xv Removed manuals and added others and changed details for manuals W446 and W336 Pages xxiv and xxv Added precautions Page 30 Changed the reference for creating I O tables Page 40 Removed model number for the CX Programmer and added information on relevant manuals Page 41 Added information on unit version restrictions Pages 74 and 75 Changed SMTP to SNTP Page 100 Removed to be included in Pages 103 and 121 Changed the reference for FINS node address settings Page 166 Changed the reference for error code details Page 188 Changed the reference page for IP network addresses Page 205 and 206 Changed the reference for FINS settings June 2008 Page xv Change model and name for W446 Page 4 Added server graphic and callouts to figure Page 6 Removed 5 from figure Pages 13 and 14 Changed specifications for number of cascade connections Page 35 Removed RH509E Page 66 Changed ms to s at bottom left of table Page 84 Changed ON to OFF for bit 13 description April 2009 Added information for unit version 1 5 Made corrections and revised expressions and nota
184. from clients without requiring ladder programming Additional E mail Functions Mail Receive Function Receiving Commands for the PLC by E mail E mail File Attachment Function With previous Ethernet Unit models CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 e mail could sent only from the Ethernet Unit and the data that could be sent was limited to user created ASCII text data and system data Now the following e mail functions have been added Commands for the PLC mail remote commands can be written into e mail and the Ethernet Unit can receive them execute them and send responses by e mail This function can be linked to the CS CJ File Memory function Features Section 1 2 e The Ethernet Unit can automatically generate data files 6 000 words maximum per file from the CPU Unit s I O memory status and send them to specified e mail addresses as e mail attachments It can also send pro gram files from the Memory Card up to 1 MB to specified e mail addresses as e mail attachments e In addition to using the existing Mail Send Switch or having e mail sent at regular intervals it is possible to set triggers for sending e mail for exam ple by having e mail sent when a PV in the CPU Unit s I O memory reaches a certain value size comparison or when the bit at a specified address turns ON e Up to eight of these e mail send conditions destination trigger type etc can be preregistered so that e mail will be sent automa
185. from the IP router table Set the IP address of the remote node in the IP address table or use automatic address conversion Are the FINS network addresses of the local and emote nodes different Set both nodes to the same FINS network address Do not attempt to broadcast to a node with a different network number You can broadcast only to nodes on the same IP network Are you attempting a broadcast transmission Are the routing tables set improperly Y _ Set routing tables at the local node target node and any relay nodes Are you attempting to communicate with a PLC on another network Go to Network Connection Problems E N D 214 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 3 UDP Socket Problems General Problems General Problems Go through the procedure in 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND O90 RECV 098 CMND 490 before starting this procedure Is the response code a value other than 0000 y Go to 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Go to 8 5 Results Storage Area Response Codes There will be no response code in the results storage area if Socket Service Request Switches are being Is the response code in the results storage area a value other than 0000 used N Go to Network Connection Problems Opening and Closing Refer to General Problems above Problems 215 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4
186. he Ethernet Unit to the CPU Unit 143 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Execution Communications condition Port Enabled Flag C HH KEEP 011 A Input A remains ON from start to completion of commu nications instruction Reset B Creates operand and control data in a given area Operand control data created with MOV and Executes communications instructions Communications A Port Enabled Flag DIFU 013 B Creates reset input Turns reset B ON after execution of communications in struction Communications A Port Error Flag _ ___ amp Send Error Flag display Retry can be executed Execution Communications Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous condition Port Enabled Flag A KEEP 011 C Use exclusive control so that no other communica tions instructions are started before execution of the above communications instruction is complete Reset D Continued in same way The execution status of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruc tions is always reflected by the communications flags i e the Communica tions Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag The CS CJ series CPU Unit s communications flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area as shown in the following table Communications Port A202 it 7 Port 7 OFF Execution enabled Enabled Flag it 6 Port 6 being executed Port 5 ON Execution disabled Port 4 not being executed
187. he mode has been changed the following confirmation message will be displayed Click OK to restart the Ethernet Unit After the Unit has been restarted it will begin to operate in ETN21 mode 57 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 11 PLC 10 Table 1 The mode change of an Ethernet unit is completed Transfer 10 Table and Specail Unit setttings from the PLC to the PC again E Manipulating the Rotary Switches for the Node Address with a Precision Screwdriver Converting from ETN11 Mode to ETN21 Mode 1 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and set the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address as follows Node address Indicators 7 ECH MEANS ER o o non non non 2 Turn ON the power to the PLC The Unit s indicators will change as follows Node address Indicators 3 Setthe rotary switches for the node address to 01 There will be no change to the indicators Node address Indicators pagt i aet f RUN IC of t non Nor 4 Setthe rotary switches for the node address to F1 The RUN indicator will begin to flash Node address Indicators x16 x16 RUN ERC ERH 5 Set the rotary switches for the node address to 01 The Unit mode change function will start and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five seconds Node address Indicators padel sit RUN ERG EAH Co _ Flashing Ut Flashing 6 After the mode has been changed the indicators
188. her manufacturers Up to eight ports can be used for various protocols enabling the use of vari ous applications Simplified Socket Services Without using the CMND 490 instruction the socket services function for TCP or UDP can be simplified by presetting parameters and using dedicated bits In addition the size of received data accumulated in the reception buffer is now stored and a Data Received Flag has been added These new fea tures eliminate the need for ladder programs to monitor the timing for comple tion of instructions and socket service processing and thus reduce the amount of labor required for program development Features Section 1 2 Starting with unit version 1 5 the performance of sending and receiving has been improved using optional settings for the TCP or UDP socket services using specific bits in memory Also a linger socket option has been added to the TCP socket services Specifying this option enables open processing immediately with the same port number without having to wait approximately 1 min until the port number opens after the socket closes Improved FINS Message Communications The following functions have been improved over previous Ethernet Unit mod els They allow the scale of the system to be increased and can give greater flexibility to the system configuration including the host computer e Expanded number of nodes to 254 max from 126 max e Communications are now enabled ev
189. hernet Unit is Time slice instruction execution time given priority Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with syn CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser asynchronous memory vicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral access port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 2 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice peripheral servicing execution given priority time Note Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn 4 of CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with 1 ms max asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than those calculated with the methods given here Among the causes of longer delays are the following traffic on the network window sizes at network Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section
190. hose connections the default setting of 0 0 0 0 can be used e When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit i e the server that is to be connected by FINS TCP It is required that an IP address be set for the remote Ethernet Unit Auto allocated If the client normally a personal computer applica From 239 to FINS node tion supports FINS TCP and if FINS node 254 for con addresses are not fixed the client will take O as its nection Nos node address Then when a FINS command 1 to 16 arrives the number set here from 239 to 254 will automatically be allocated as the client s FINS node address For details on automatic allocation of FINS node addresses refer to the Operation Manual Construc tion of Applications keep alive For each connection number set whether or not the remote node connection check function is to be used for the FINS TCP server and client If the keep alive box is checked here then when the remote node goes without responding for longer than the monitor time set in the Setup the connec tion will be terminated If a remote node turns OFF without warning the connection will remain open indefinitely so this option should be used whenever possible For details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks 65 DNS Section 3 3 3 3 DNS CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters FI Setti
191. ht be set to O A correct memory area code has not been used or EM Area is not available The first word is in an inacces sible area or the bit number is not OO The address set in the com mand is not correct The response frame is too long Parameters are set incorrectly in the command data With respect to a FINS node address that could not be dynamically changed a FINS message was received from an IP address that differed from the Unit Setup Section 8 4 Remedy Check the parameters Be sure the socket number is between 1 and 8 Set the Local UDP port number correctly Check the command s memory area code in the Results Storage Area and set the appropriate code Set a first word that is in an accessible area The bit number must be 00 for Ethernet Units Correct the address in the com mand data being sure that the start address plus the number of words does not exceed accessi ble memory Correct the number of data ele ments or other parameters in the command data for which the response is being returned Check the command data and correct any parameters that are incorrect Referring to SECTION 5 Deter mining IP Addresses correct the relationships between IP addresses and FINS node addresses 229 Troubleshooting Procedures Main code Check point Probable cause The same socket service is already in progress at the Socket status area OF Service in progress
192. i CX Programmer etc FINS TCP client computer i Communications in Intranet L a Ethernet l E K a El PLC PLC Pa FL Lad oh 7 i Communications l in Intranet Ethernet Unit Private address Ethernet Unit Private address I ep i ee gp Pp ce J Conditions for Using When the Ethernet Unit has a private address communications applications Communications can be used under the following conditions Applications 1 2 3 1 FINS Communications Service e FINS communications service is enabled only between Ethernet Units with private addresses on the intranet A device such as a personal computer with a FINS application including a CX Programmer cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an Ethernet Unit that has a private address FINS communi cations over the Internet are also not possible between Ethernet Units with private addresses e Either FINS TCP or FINS UDP can be used for the FINS communications service e With FINS UDP all of the Ethernet Unit IP address conversion methods can be used 110 Private and Global Addresses Note Section 5 3 With FINS UDP when the IP address private address of a computer serving as a DHCP client is changed the Ethernet Unit s IP address con version method will be the automatic generation method dynamic the combined method or the IP address table method When FINS TCP is used IP addresses can be changed automatica
193. ibes the C series Host Link and FINS communica tions commands used when ee communications commands to CS series and CJ series CPU Units Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CS series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring l O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring l O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 Describes programming tasks file memory and other functions for the CS series and CJ series PLCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs and Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 Manual Contents number W446 WS02 CXPCL V8 CX Programmer Provides information on how to use the CX Programmer Ver 8 0 Operation a Windows based programming device
194. ications for DOO200 would be 0000 from above table plus C8 decimal 200 converted to hexadecimal or 00C8 160 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 Command Response Reference 7 3 1 RESET Command Block Response Block Precautions Response Codes Note This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to Ethernet Units and the responses to each command The command response and where applicable the results storage blocks are given with the commands in graphic form as shown in the following dia gram If the data is fixed it is included in the blocks If the data is variable it is described following the blocks Each box represents 1 byte every two boxes represents 1 word The following diagram shows 2 bytes or 1 word mum Two bytes The results storage format is the format used to store transfer results and data for socket services requested with command codes 2701 to 2714 Response codes applicable to the command are described at the end of the command description If any UNIX error codes are generated these are also described Refer to your UNIX error symbol definition file usr include sys errno h for details UNIX errors are returned in the results storage area Except for special cases all send receive data is in hexadecimal format Reset the Ethernet Unit 0803 pe Command code posos nv de e Command Response code code No response will be returned if the command
195. ice connected to the Ethernet network is allocated a unique Ethernet address For the Ethernet Unit this Ethernet address is shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12 digit hexadecimal number omron CJ1W ETN21 ETHERNET UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN QA E Ethernet Address Ethernet address 12 digits Note The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command CON TROLLER DATA READ For details refer to 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ on page 162 Indicators The status of the indicators show the operating status of the Ethernet Unit as shown below CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX 100Base TX ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LNK 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 25 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 Indicator Color Meaning RUN ae lit Operation stopped Hardware error Lit Normal operation 100M Green A lit 10 Mbps 10Base T Transfer speed Lit 100 Mbps 100Base TX lit Unit normal aie Unit error fe address not between 1 and 254 E hardware e g internal memory error has occurred ERH Not lit CPU Unit normal Unit normal CPU Unit error An error has occurred at the A ge _ Unit There is an error in the I O table unit number unit setup or routing table settings Flashing An illegal IP address has been set With automatic address gener ation the rightmost two digits of the IP address do not match the node address SD Yellow Not
196. ied out the end network can be reached by following the relay points 124 Creating Routing Tables PLC 1 local node Section 6 4 The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC 1 the local node network address 1 node address 1 to PLC 4 the destination node network address 3 node address 2 Node 2 PLC 3 Unit 0 relay node PLC 4 destination node Node 1 Network 1 Network 2 Network ae D PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3 End network To go to network 3 first go to node 3 at network 1 Note relay network table local network table Unit number Local network address End Relay Relay network network node To go to network 3 first go to node 2 at network 2 The network is the same To go to network 3 so go to node 2 at network 3 according to the local network table go through unit number 1 of the local CPU Rack In the above example the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC 4 from PLC 1 are shown Additional settings would be required in the rout ing tables for a message to reach PLC 1 from PLC 4 Refer to 6 4 3 Rout ing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples 6 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC Routing tables must be created by a CX Integrator connected to the PLC They cannot be created using a Programming Console For details on how to connect and use th
197. ing transmission Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks 7 3 17 TCP CLOSE REQUEST Requests processing to close a TCP socket Other processing being carried out is forcibly ended and a code is recorded in the results storage area EXON Tl sn o e y ll Command Results storage area code Command Block TCP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Response code Response Block Results Storage Format 183 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Socket Option Command TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Precautions Response Codes The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O The TCP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Any other processing such as sending or receiving data being carried out when this close command is executed will be forcibly ended and a code will be stored in the results storage area to indicate that this processing was forc ibly ended High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 2240 Socket service mode is inco
198. ion 2 10 Communications Test If the basic settings in particular the IP address and subnet mask have been made correctly for the Ethernet Unit then it should be possible to communi cate with nodes on the Ethernet This section describes how to use the PING command to perform communi cations testing between Ethernet Units 2 10 1 PING Command 52 The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is commu nicating correctly The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and responses The echo response packet is automatically returned by the ICMP The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote nodes when configuring a network The Ethernet Unit supports both the ICMP echo request and reply functions Communications Test 2 10 2 Ethernet Unit Section 2 10 If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command then the nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are cor rect PLC Remote Node host computer or Ethernet Unit TCP UDP Ethernet Unit Ethernet Echo request Echo response The Ethernet Unit automatically returns the echo response packet in response to an echo request packet sent by another node host computer or other Ethernet Unit An echo request packet can be sent to another node by issuing the FINS
199. ion Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 7 Using FINS Communi cations to Create Host Applications The default settings should normally be used Local Device Is a Client 1 2 Set the client Set the IP addresses for the connection destination Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit i e the server connected by FINS TCP This setting must be made if this Ethernet Unit is to be used as a FINS TCP client IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 5 2 3 Application Examples Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method Note With FINS UDP whether using the automatic conversion method dynamic the IP address table method or the combined method remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses in the internal table are changed after FINS messages are received Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command origi nated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected Le FINS command sent LJ IP address FINS command Ethernet E M IP address FINS response j Ethernet Unit with fixed IP address Response sent back to J changed IP address io With FINS TCP FINS node
200. ion Numbers TCP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS TCP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame TCP frame FINS TCP header frame and FINS frame A TCP data section FINS TCP header FINS frame that exceeds the segment size default 1 024 bytes with automatic adjustment for optimum values between the nodes is split into TCP packets for transmission The split TCP data is then joined automatically at the remote node s TCP IP protocol layer The TCP IP protocol layer however cannot determine where the data has been split so the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined together Therefore when using the FINS TCP method FINS TCP headers must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS frame delimiters The length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored in the header allowing the frame to be separated out by the remote node With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGateway Ver 2003 the appropriate frames are separated out automatically so there is normally no need to be pay attention to it at the application layer The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed using TCP IP this port number must be allocated for the com munications service The default setting for the FINS TCP local TCP port number i e the Ethernet Unit s TCP port number is 9600
201. ion 2 11 Format classification o o o o Emme o o o 1 JErn2rmode The CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format can be changed in either of the following two ways Select the method that can be used in the system in which the Unit is to be replaced e By means of the CX Programmer s Unit Setup e By manipulating the rotary switches for the node address with a precision screwdriver E Using the Change ETN21 Mode Command from the Options Menu in the I O Table Window of the CX Programmer 1 Select Change ETN21 Mode from the Options Menu in the l O Table Win dow i1 PLC IO Table NewPLC File Edit View el akl T CJ1G CPI E Inner Bo L3 0000 M 7 OO 15 sl o1 00 y oz 00 lt os oo q 04 00 Fl os oo lt 06 00 lt o7 00 lt 08 00 lt 09 oo 0000 R 0000 R 0000 R Change ETW21 Mode Transfer to PLC Transfer From the PLE af Compare with PLE Verify arnet Unit Umit Online Add Unit d Racks Slot Start Addresses Units Profile information Dip Switch Information Change ETN21 Mode Consumption and Width Start Special Application d Compare with Project Check CILG CPU45H Run 2 The following confirmation message will be displayed To change the mode click Yes PLC 10 Table The unit is reset after the mode is changed Changes the mode of an Ethernet unit ETNI 1mode gt ETN21mode Do you wish to continue Mo 3 After t
202. ion 3 Data is sent in one direction with no confirmation of whether the data was received Because there are few procedures involved data can be sent at high speed but with less reliability than with TCP The FINS UDP method has the following features e Because FINS UDP is a connectionless protocol there is no limit to the number of corrections e FINS UDP can be used for broadcasting e When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers such as the Internet communications reliability drops The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending and receiving data on an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 OP UDP FINS frame FCS UDP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS UDP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame UDP frame and FINS frame A UDP data sec tion FINS frame that exceeds 1 472 bytes is split into packets for transmis sion The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP IP protocol layer There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this split but it may not be possible to send 1 472 byte UDP packets over an IP network with multiple layers When using the FINS communications service in a system such as this select the FINS TCP method FINS UDP Method Section 6 2 UDP Port Numbers for The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer FINS UDP i e the FINS communications service in this
203. is completed are described in this section The transmission delay for the SEND 090 instruction can be calculated using the following equation which is illustrated in the following diagram Max delay CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node Transmission processing time Transmission Delays Reception processing time CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node service cycle local node l CPU Bus Unit service Y processing time local node Y Transmission processing time Y Transmission Delays Y Reception processing time CPU Bus Unit y service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service Y processing time remote node CPU data set Y processing time remote node Maximum transmission delay CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU execution mode roce asno time considerations Normal Mode i Priority peripheral ser vicing Parallel processing with synchronous memory access Parallel processing with 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit access peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual 149 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6
204. it correctly Be sure broadcast transmissions 10 Com mand format error don t exceed 1 473 bytes 02 Command Command data The command is shorter than Check the command format of too short min permissible length the command and set it correctly 03 Element data Command data The designated number of data Check the number of items and mismatch items differs from the actual the data and make sure that number in the command data they agree 05 Header Command data Data for another node on the Check the header parameters in parameter error same network was received the command data and be sure from the network the correct command format is An attempt was made to send Deing used response data for a broadcast address 228 Troubleshooting Procedures Main code Check point Probable cause 11 Parame ter error 21 Cannot write 00 Parameter error 01 No area specification 03 Address specification out of range 04 Address range exceeded OB Response too long OC Parameter error 08 Cannot change Parameters in command data Memory area code in command data First word address in com mand data Command data Command data Parameters in command data IP address con version method The parameters in the com mand data are incorrect The UDP TCP socket number was not within the proper range The local UDP port number mig
205. ld not write clock data in that operation mode Construction of Applications Automatic Clock Adjustment Function and check the operat ing conditions Error Log Section 8 3 Detailed error code Correction 2nd byte 0601 a Bus Unit error Arbitrary Restart the CPU Unit If the prob Saved lem persists replace the Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit memory error 01 Read 06 Error log Restart the CPU Unit If the prob Saved error lem persists replace the Ethernet except 02 Write Unit for error error log Note 1 The time information in the CPU Unit is used in the CPU Bus Units 2 If the time information cannot be read from the CPU Unit the time stamp in the error log will be all zeros This can occur due to CPU Unit startup error unit number errors CPU error and model number errors If the time is read out from a Programming Device the time will be shown as all ze ros in the year 2000 3 The battery must be installed in the CS CJ series CPU Unit the power turned ON and then the time set before the clock in the CPU Unit can be used The time will not be set correctly in the error log unless the clock time is set correctly 4 An error record is not created in EEPROM when a CPU Bus Unit memory error occurs 212 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures The following procedures can be used to troubleshoot various problems in system operation 8 4 1 Startup Proble
206. led Flags A203 to Communications A210 Port Completion A219 A219 00 to A219 07 Codes A302 A302 00 to A302 15 A402 A402 03 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Flag Non fatal error A402 07 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error A403 A403 00to Memory Error A403 08 Location A410 A410 00to CPU Bus Unit Num ber Duplication Flags 90 Communications Port Error Flags CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags Bits A202 00 to A202 07 turn ON when a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR can be executed with the corresponding port number Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports O to 7 These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding port numbers when network instructions SEND RECV CMND or PMCR have been executed Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports O to 7 Bits A219 00 to A219 07 turn ON when an error occurred during execution of a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 Bits A302 00 through A302 15 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units Units 0 through 15 respectively are initializing The bits will turn ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit A501 00 to A501 15 is turned ON Bit A402 03 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in the I O tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU op
207. lete 6 FileDelete command 73 FileL ist command 6 73 FileRead command 6 73 FileWrite command 6 73 FINS communications 9 16 commands 158 161 format 159 from PLCs 137 sending 137 socket services 159 data contents 138 data length 137 destination 137 echo test 53 Index memory areas 160 node addresses 9 overview 17 port numbers 138 response codes 158 227 response monitor time 138 responses 161 retries 138 socket numbers 159 specifications 117 137 TCP IP 3 9 testing 184 troubleshooting 214 UDPY IP 2 9 FINS node addresses automatic allocation 9 FINS TCP 3 117 120 communications 122 connection numbers 121 connection status 122 features 120 frame format 121 procedure 123 TCP port number 121 FINS TCP Mode field 65 FINS TCP Port field 62 FINS TCP Tab 64 FINS UDP 2 50 117 118 frame format 118 procedure 119 UDP port numbers 119 FINS UDP Port field 62 FinsGateway 12 132 FinsSend command 6 73 flags Closing Flag 80 Communications Port Enabled Flags 90 Communications Port Error Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags 91 Data Received Flag 8 80 Error Flags 164 FTP Status Flag 82 Opening Flag 80 Receiving Flag 80 Results Storage Error Flag 80 255
208. lly Transferring Files Files can be transferred using FTP protocol between the PLC and a device such as a personal computer i e an FTP client with a private address on the intranet The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Sending Mail The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit s IP address to the SMTP server by mail via the intranet Receiving Mail The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the POP3 server by mail via the intranet Automatic Clock Adjustment The PLC can acquire clock data through the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the SNTP server via the intranet Host Name Designation The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit s IP ad dress from the DNS server via the intranet Network Security and Firewalls Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security con siderations Before doing so be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider installing a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications company 111 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 3 Ethernet Unit with a Global Address over Internet Private address Intranet D TAN CX Programmer etc LJ FINS TCP client computer AS Ethernet
209. ltiple Segments Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS UDP and construct applications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 The protocol processing for FINS UDP is simpler than for FINS TCP giving FINS UDP certain advantages in terms of performance Another feature of FINS UDP is that it can be used for broad casting On the other hand with FINS UDP it is necessary to provide measures such as retries for handling communications errors Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP and construct applications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS TCP is the initial func tion supported by this Ethernet Unit CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It pro vides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Reference Intranet Production line A Ethernet Unit Tea Connecting through multiple segments communications Use FINS TCP me Production line B Ethernet Mail Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit e LLL PLC E a l L S FINS message Memory Card communica
210. ly from the various settings that have been made Depending on the setting method used data such as remote IP addresses are changed dynamically Dynamic changes can be prohibited 97 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 FINS header FINS data lote port node number ample i i SS el Node number i E NE Transport level UDP gpp ort TCP meaa Application level FINS X PP VEN Node number Internet level IP V IP address A Ar Transport level x Physical level Ethernet g 4 UDP port TCP pur Ethernet address UDP A number TCP number E IP address The remote node s IP address UDP TCP A method UDP port number and TCP port Ethernet ry number are calculated from the node number in the FINS message and an Ethernet frame is generated Internet level IR Physical level su Re O OOO O 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables FINS UDP Communications Methods Automatic Generation When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted the following values are set Dynamic for addresses in the internal table e Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the dyna
211. manual 152 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 1 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode Set peripheral servicing time Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn 1 ms max chronous memory access Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Transmission processing time command Number of words sent x 0 002 0 550 ms Transmission Delay Command The transmission delay time will be as follows depending on the baud rate set for the Ethernet Unit There may be additional delays depending on devices such as hubs in the network configuration Delay time 100Base TX 0 0118 ms Number of words sent x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T 0 0157 ms Number of words sent x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Reception processing time command Command 0 704ms Response Number of words sent x 0 003 0 704 ms CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice instruction execution
212. mer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC3 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting PLC name PLOS Network classification Ethernet Network Tab FINS destination FINS transmission source address Networknumber 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 9600 CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Same as for System Configuration Example 1 Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer them 1 Using CX Integrator connect online and select Routing table Settings Then create FINS local routing tables a local network table and a relay network table Example PLC 1 Routing Table Settings 131 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 e Local Network Table Unit number Locat network number e Relay Network Table None Example PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Unit number Local network number O e Relay Network Table In order to relay from PLC2 3 to the final network number 1 it is necessary to relay via node address 1 i e the Controller Link Unit on relay network number 2 Final network number Relay network number Relay node address eo 2 Save the routing table file File Save local routing table file 3 Select New from the Project Menu and save with a file name Then select Add Device from the Project Menu For each PLC register a PLC with a direct serial connection
213. mes the hold packet is resent Always 0 15 The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the connection is cut off 2 Send Information 40 Bytes Ten information items are returned in the following sequence 1 2 3 The total number of packets sent The number of data packets sent The number of data bytes sent The number of data packets resent The number of data bytes resent The number of ACK packets sent The number of window probes 1 octet of data sent The number of emergency data packets sent Always 0 The number of window advertisement packets sent 10 The number of control packets SYN FIN RST sent o E E 3 Receive Information Twenty one information items are returned in the following sequence 12 dci The total number of packets received The number of packets received continuously The number of bytes received continuously The number of received packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum The number of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller than the minimum size for a TCP header or was larger than the IP packet NIN E 195 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 UDP Status Response 152 dei Precautions Response Codes 196 6 The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header could not be stored in the first short buffer 7 The number of resent packets received 8 The number of bytes in the resend packets 9
214. mic Model Series Supports automatic Version generation method dynamic CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21 Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 No Set by automatic 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 generation method or combined method Com munications are not pos sible with personal computers with variable IP addresses CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Unit 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 No Set by automatic CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 generation method or Ethernet Unit combined method Com munications are not pos FinsGateway Version 4 xx Or sible with personal lower computers with variable IP addresses Version 2003 or Yes higher Programmable Terminal No Set manually so that Open Network Controller ONC aan li generation method 106 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Static Model Series Supports automatic Version generation method static CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21 Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 Yes Simply called auto 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 Matic generation method CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Unit 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11___ Yes Simply called auto CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 Matic generation Ethernet Unit method FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Version 2003 or Yes higher Programmable Terminal No Set manually so that Open Network Controller ONC automatic s
215. mic method data in an internal table that has been generated can be dynamically converted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP Ethernet Unit CPU Unit Personal computer Remote FINS node number Ch Local FINS node number Must be fixed ista registration Automatic generation dynamic setting Internal table Local FINS node number Can be changed Local IP address Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command fu Ethernet IP address FINS response For the remote IP address a response is returned to the changed IP address Automatic Generation With the static method as well the following values are set for addresses in Static the internal table when the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted 98 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 e Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the static method however data in an internal table that has been gener ated is not freely changed Ethernet Unit CPU Unit Remote FINS node number Personal computer Local FINS node number Mus
216. minated nications Ser vice a Connec 2 Turned A by the Unit when a connection is tion No 15 established Unit Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec Unit Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is tion No 16 established OFF Unit Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated 4 2 DM Area Allocations The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number Offset Bit 15 08 07 00 Data direction Related communications services Send Mail function Send Mail Status 1 Operation Manual Construction ob Applications Section 2 TCP Socket No 1 Number of Bytes Received Socket Services Operation Manual Construction of Applications Section 6 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit TCP Socket No 8 Connection Status Send Mail function Operation Manual Construction of Applications Section 2 rete 7 Socket Services Operation Manual Construction of Applications Section 6 Send Mail Status 2 Socket Services Parameter Area 1 Socket Services Parameter Area 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit or IP Address Display Setting Area CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit 86 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 The meanings of the items shown in the above diagram are explained
217. mission is required into the IP router table Check the remote node s unit address and make sure the cor rect one is being used in the con trol data IP address of remote node not set correctly in IP address table or IP router table IP address table IP router table Control data in instruction No node with the specified unit address Response to CONTROLLER STATUS READ and PROTOCOL STATUS READ FINS command Message packet was corrupted Check the protocol and controller by transmission error status by reading them with FINS commands Increase the num ber of transmit retry attempts Increase the value for the response monitor time in the control data Read out the error log and cor rect as required Control data in instruction Response time out response watchdog timer interval too short 227 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Main code Check point Probable cause Remedy 03 Communi 01 Communica ERC indicator on Error occurred in the communi Take corrective action referring cations con tions controller the Controller cations controller ERC indica to troubleshooting procedures in troller error error tor is lit this section 02 CPU Unit Remote CPU Unit CPU Unit error occurred in the Check CPU Unit indicators at the error indicators PLC at the remote node remote node and clear the error in the CPU Unit refer to the PC s operation manuals 04 Unit number U
218. mmunications error or a mistake in the communications path settings Clock information cannot be changed because a bus error occurred between the PLC and the Ethernet Unit Turn OFF the power and restart the PLC If the problem occurs again replace the PLC Backplane or Ethernet Unit For some CPU Unit models and lots there are operation modes in which clock information cannot be changed For the following model and lot numbers clock information cannot be changed while using RUN Mode or Monitor Mode in asynchronous mode e CS1G H CPULILIH Lot Nos 030430 and earlier e CJ1H G CPULILIH All lots Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes You can troubleshoot the errors in FINS communications from the response codes when the SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions have been used For the storage areas of the response codes refer to information on page 143 under 6 6 4 Writing Programs The table below lists response codes main and sub codes returned after execution of FINS commands the probable cause of errors and recom mended remedies The response codes provided here are for the Ethernet Unit Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual W227 or the operation manuals for the relevant Unit for further information on response codes The 6th 7th and 15th bits of the response codes have specific functions The 6th bit will be ON when a
219. ms Set the node address to Is the node address set between 01 and FE Hex RUN indicator lit ERC indicator lit between 01 and FE Hex N Y Replace the Ethernet Unit Make sure that sufficient power is supplied to the CPU Unit Power supplied to CPU Unit Make sure that Unit is firmly mounted and tighten the Ethernet Unit loose on Rack mounting screws firmly or lock the sliders into place Do the RUN and ERH indicators not light if another CPU Unit is mounted Y a Replace the CPU Unit that didn t work N Replace the Ethernet Unit Is the same node number used by another Unit N gt Create the I O tables in the CPU Unit Is the same unit number used by another CPU Bus Unit ERH indicator not lit us Set the unit numbers correctly Y Restart the CPU Unit If the error persists replace the CPU Unit Has a CPU Unit error occurred in the CPU Unit N Correct the IP address in the System Setup and read out the Y controller status using the READ CONTROLLER STATUS command in FINS communications and correct any problems indicated ERH indicator not flashing Make sure that the node number and the last byte of the IP address are the same and set other host IDs to O or change the address conversion method to use and IP address table or combined methods Go to Network Connection Problems 213
220. n CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Receiving Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area des ignation Sending Flag Bit 02 Turns ON if the High Speed Option is not selected when a send request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the send processing has been completed Remains OFF if the High Speed Option is selected When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Send ing Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designa tion Closing Flag Bit 03 Turns ON when a close request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the close process ing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Closing Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation Data Received Flag Bit 13 This bit turns ON when data is received from a remote node at an open TCP socket Linked to this flag the number of bytes of data saved in the reception buffer is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket in the words allo cated in the DM Area The bit is turned OFF when a receive request is made by either bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction lf any data remains in the re
221. n the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be returned The response returns the actual number of records read The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP router table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0008 8 records The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is exe cuted is returned in hexadecimal The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP router table records is calculated as the number of records x 8 bytes record The configuration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below 1 8 bytes IP Network address Router IP address Network ID IP Network Address The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal The network ID part cor responding to the address class determined by the leftmost 3 bits set here is enabled Refer to page 50 191 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Router IP Address The IP address in hexadecimal of a router connected to a network specified with IP addresses Precautions If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP router table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally Response Codes
222. namic or passive for address conversion set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ether net Unit to the same value as the node address If this is not possible either the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communi cations If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the ERC indicator will light Mounting to a PLC Unit Operating Mode Change Function Section 2 3 If the node address is set to 00 the Unit operating mode change function will start This function changes the format for the Unit Setup in the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area when converting to a CS1W ETN21 or CU1W ETN21 Ether net Unit from one of the previous models CS1W ETNO1 11 or CJ1W ET11 For details refer to 2 11 Converting from Previous Models 2 3 Mounting to a PLC 2 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC Note Ethernet Units can be mounted to any slots in either a CS series CPU Rack or a CS series Expansion CPU Rack but the number of slots to which they can be mounted depends on the Backplane Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CP
223. nd files to be trans ferred The following items can be used as PLC File Memory e A Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit e EM File Memory The portion of the EM Area in the CPU Unit s I O mem ory used by the CX Programmer as File Memory SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Creating an Original Communications Procedure Using TCP IP UDP IP for the Host Application or Communicating with PLCs from Another Manufacturer Operation Reference Using the socket services function create a communications application in the ladder program With the socket services function TCP IP or UDP IP can be used directly to receive data Use the socket services to create applications based on manip ulating control bits or the CMND 490 instruction SECTION 4 Socket Service Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Features Section 1 2 Automatically Adjusting the PLC s Internal Clock at Regular Intervals Operation Use the automatic clock adjustment function With the automatic clock adjustment function the SNTP server s clock is taken as the standard for automatically adjusting the built in clock of the PLC connected to the Ethernet Unit The adjustment can be regularly executed at a specified time once a day and it can be executed each time by the ladder program To use the automatic clock adjustment function there must be a separate SNTP server on the network Asid
224. ndow shows the default settings 4 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help f Back gt x a P Search lo Favorites La SS S Address http 192 168 250 1 0 OMRON Ethernet unit HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Server Setup Settings Parameter Value WEB Password Menu WEB Password Confirm 1 TP address and Protocols Port No 0 0 default 80 o System Option JUse WEB Function 2 IP address router table o IP address table o TP router table 3 FINS TCP o Connection 1 8 o Connection 9 16 4 Send Mal o Mail address o Send Mail 5 Receive Mail 251 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 6 Make the required settings i e the password in this example To prevent incorrect password entry set the same password in the WEB Password field and WEB Password Confirm field HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Server Setup Parameter Value WEB Password WEB Password Confirm m Port Ho 0 0 default 8 0y Option Use WEB Function Set Cancel Regist Reload 7 After entering the correct password click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button SELL LJ set Cancel Reqist I Reload The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal computer and temporarily register them in the Ethernet Unit The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registe
225. ne name sent as attachments then specify the name of the file that is to be sent 71 Receive Mail Section 3 8 Defaul Interval time When Periodic Set the time interval for sending 0 timer is setas mail the mail trigger 4 to 1 440 10 to 14 400 min in type units of 10 min 10 minutes When Bit value Set the time interval for monitor O change or ing the value at a specified 1 second Word value address change is set 4 to 1 000 1 to 1 000 s in units as the mail trig of 1 5 gor ype Default 0000 For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 3 8 Receive Mail CS1W ETNZ1 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters E Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 Source Mail Address Protection Protect by mail address Source mail Attached File Recened Command Received lf Receive a specified extension file only i Receive a specified command only W OBJ Iw CS Filewrite ChangeMode W STO W TXT W FileRead W ErrorlogRead 10M FileDelete W ErrorlogClear lw FileList W MaillogRead Custom i ertet W UMBEackup W MaillogClear D Custom extension PARAMBackup Y Test Custom3 exterior lOMwrite FinsSend W OMRead TrensteflrittoPC _TransfetPCto Uni Compare Sosw Pern Set Defaute Cancel Posting Mail Address Protection Setting O i
226. net Unit from the CX Programmer s l O Table Window while connected online and then setting the IP address from the Unit Setup Example Using the CX Programmer to Set the IP Address to 10 3 65 1 CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All 4 3650 f Default 9600 f Default 9600 0 min 0 default 110 A10 42850 C User defined C User defined Performance of socket service IP Addte Quo 3 65 11 Conversion Baud Rate eds f Auto dynamic Ola ARUP Ue ten Auto Static C AOBASE T Destination IF is changed dynamically eee Combined O Destination IFP is Not changed dynamically Enable CIDR CIP address table C ETN11 compatible mode FTP IF Address Table IP Router Table Login Ese Port No o 0 Detault 21 J irs Dal Tienstedliritio PC _TrensfetPCto Unid Compare Sotsw estar SetDefauts Cancel When an IP address is set in the Unit Setup that value is displayed in the IP Address Display Setting Area in the DM Area words allocated for CPU Bus Units When the IP address is set by the CX Programmer and the defaults are used for all other Unit settings the settings will be as shown below IP address Set by CX Programmer Subnet mask Uses value corresponding to IP address class when not using CIDR E Subne
227. ng FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt DNS Server Setting IF Address T 0 0 0 Fort Mo 0 0 Default 53 Retry Timer 0 secs 0 Default 10 LTrensfefUrittoPt Trastero Unid Compare Sotsw_ estat SetDefauts Cancel DNS Server Setup mem Comet O Derat IP Address Set the IP address for the DNS server The DNS server is required when specifying the POPS SMTP or SNTP servers by host name for the mail send function or mail receive function Port No Set the port to be used for connecting to the DNS 0 server Number 53 is This setting does not normally need to be changed used Retry Timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec tion to the DNS server fails This setting does not normally need to be changed 66 SMTP Section 3 4 3 4 SMTP SMTP Server Setup CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters fx Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt SMTP Server Setting Designation Method te F Address C Host name IF Address 0 0 0 0 Host Name Se Port No bo o 0 Default 25 Local Mail Address Use POP before SMTP LTrensfefUrittoPt Trastero Unid Compare Sotsw_ estat SetDefauts Cancel Jos O Domn Designation Select whether the SMTP server used for send IP Address Method ing mail is to be specified by IP add
228. ng SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 Make the settings shown below when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the user s ladder diagram program in the PC SEND 090 The SEND 090 instruction sends the data in n number of words starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the words starting from the begin ning word D at the remote destination node node address N Local node Destination node number N 15 0 D gt Number hi of words SEND 90 S Local node beginning word D Destination beginning word D C First word of control data below 15 0 lo 14 7 SS Con pr Number of words n L Number of retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words 0 to F Hex O to 15 retries Communications port number 0 to 7 15 11 8 7 0 ef o o Response JR 0 Required Destination network number 1 Not required 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 11 87 0 _ Qo m ee __ MMM Destination unit address L Response monitor time obio CPU Unit 0000 Hex 2 s rfl Hex Unit 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s El Hex Inner Board EUS Ones FE Hex Unit connected to network Destination node number N 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message service does not
229. nipulated Unit operation Reference by FTP Status Flag Unit FTP server operating FTP client Operation Manual Con connected struction of Applica bad na FTP server on standby FTP client 0ns SECTION 4 not connect Accessing Memory alll Unit ON while CPU Unit memory is being Operation Manual Con Sending Mail accessed to create a file to be struction of Applica attached using the mail send func tions SECTION 2 tion Unit OFF when the file to be attached has been created Accessing Memory ON Unit ON while CPU Unit memory is being Operation Manual Con Receiving Mail accessed to store an attached file struction of Applica using the mail receive function tions SECTION 3 Unit OFF when the attached file has been stored 03t007 Notused fff 08 to 11 ae Sa For Unit Shows the current format inthe CPU SECTION 2 Installation mat OFF Unit Bus Unit System Setup Area by the and Initial Setup ON OFF status of a combination of EEN penjo E eooo Ke Unit while a link is established between hubs Unit OFF when the link between hubs is lt 15 otused e FTP Status Bit 00 Turns ON while connected to an FTP client and OFF while not connected With the FTP server function only one FTP client can be connected at a time so while this bit is ON no other clients can connect to the server The FTP status is also shown by the Ethernet Unit s FTP indicator as follows Not lit
230. nit number Unit number setting error Make sure the unit number is setting error within the specified range and that the same unit number is not used twice in the same network 04 Not exe 01 Unsupported Command code An undefined command has Check the command code and cutable command been used be sure the command is sup Service not ported by the Unit to which you supported are sending it FINS header A short frame 4 bytes is being Check the FINS header frame frame length used for the FINS header length The Ethernet Unit does frame not support short headers 05 Routing 01 Routing table Routing tables Remote node is not setin the Set the destination address in error setting error routing tables the routing tables 02 Routing Routing tables Routing tables aren t registered Set routing tables at the local tables not regis completely node remote node and any tered relay nodes 03 Routing table Routing tables Routing table error Set the routing tables correctly error 04 Too many Network configu The maximum number of relay Redesign the network or recon relays ration nodes 2 was exceeded in the sider the routing table to reduce command the number of relay nodes in the command Communications are possible on three network levels including the local network 01 Command Command data The command is longer than Check the command format of too long the max permissible length the command and set
231. nnection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address Local IP address network number FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the combined method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not dynamically changed For all others nodes the data from FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be dynamically changed when the Unit is turned ON or restarted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table FINS node number 18 153 214 0 62 20 153 214 0 129 gt IP address 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent IP address Node number in IP address table Node number not in IP address table Network number xx xx 00 00 gt IP address FINS node number xx Automatic See note generation FINS command method sent When FINS Command is Received FINS node number Node number Internal table not in IP ETES A address table 25 153 218 51 10 __ IP address Changed A AA 153 218 51 10
232. node address 0 and select it 4 With CX Integrator select Open from the PLC Menu 5 Select Routing table Setup read the saved file and select Options Transfer to PLC Click Yes to transfer the routing tables to the connected PLCs 6 5 2 FinsGateway FinsGateway Ver 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS TCP between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units FinsGateway Ver 3 1 or lower versions can be used however when commu nicating by the FINS UDP method only m Overview of Setup Methods 1 Starting FinsGateway Settings Select FinsGateway FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup 2 ETN UNIT Driver Setup 1 Double click on ETN_UNIT in the settings for the network and Unit The fol lowing ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed 132 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 e Network Tab ETH_UNIT Properties Ed Network number fo Local node number 100 Communication unit number f T Wee rd etinedt e Network number Set the network number for the personal computer Ethernet port e Local node address Set the personal computer Ethernet port node address 1 to 254 on the Ethernet network e Communication unit number Set the unit number in decimal 16 to 31 for the per sonal computer Ethernet port e Communication Unit Tab ETN_UNIT Properties Ea UDF port number seno Primary IF address P ddrezs 10
233. node addresses remote IP addresses TCP UDP and remote port numbers It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted and it is automatically changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS TCP method or when a FINS command received The following functions are enabled by using this table e P address conversion using the FINS UDP method e Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS TCP method e Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS TCP method e Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications 117 FINS UDP Method Section 6 2 6 2 FINS UDP Method 6 2 1 Overview FINS UDP Features FINS UDP Frame Format 118 The FINS UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP IP protocol UDP IP is a connectionless communications protocol When a message is sent from one node to another the two nodes have an equal rela tionship and there is no clear connection If using TCP is like making a tele phone call then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand Although the UDP protocol is fast data communications are less reliable than with TCP In particular when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing the user must program measures such as retries into applications in order to improve reliability Data transmission 1 Data transmission 2 Data transmiss
234. non fatal error has occurred in the PC at the remote node the 7th bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PC at the remote node and the 15th bit will be ON when a network relay error has occurred Refer to information given after the following table for more informa tion on relay errors First byte Second byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Main response code MRES Sub response code SRES 1 PLC fatal error flag 1 PLC non fatal error flag 1 Relay error flag Check point Probable cause 00 Normal completion 01 Local node error 03 Local node send error 05 Node address setting error 07 Local node busy cannot send 01 Remote node not in network 02 Remote node error 02 No such Unit 05 Response timeout Read error log The transmission frame may be corrupted or the internal reception buffer full Reduce the load traffic on the Ethernet Unit a your user applications Correct the local IP address Send error in local node was caused by lack of available space in internal buffers The network cannot be accessed because the IP address setting is not correct The internal buffers are full Correct the user application to because there is too much traf reduce traffic at the Ethernet fic at the local node preventing Unit data from being sent Local IP address System load Set IP address of remote node into IP address table and if inter network trans
235. not duplicated 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8 bit fields called octets These four octets provide the network number net ID and host number host ID The network number identifies the network and the host number identifies the node or host on the network The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes A B and C so that the address system can be selected according to the scale of the network Classes D and E are not used The configuration of the IP address for each of these classes is shown in the following diagram Bit 31 23 0 Class A O Network number 7 bits Host number 24 bits Bit 31 15 0 Class B SO Network number 14 bits Host number 16 bits Bit 31 T 0 ClassC 1 1 0 Network number 21 bits Host number 8 bits Bit 31 0 Class D 1111 o Multicast address Cannot be used Bit 31 0 Class E Identification address Cannot be used The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on the network differ according to the class Number of networks Number of hosts 224 2 max 16 777 214 max 26 2 max 65 594 max 28 2 max 254 max The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each and expressed as a punctuated number IP addresses are represented by the decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32 bit address each sepa rated by a
236. not operate the control system in the following locations e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration N Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the Ethernet Unit N WARNING Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground of 100 Q or less when installing the Units Not connecting to a ground of 100 2 or less may result in electric shock XXxiii Application Precautions 5 e Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit Slaves and Commu nications Units before attempting any of the following Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock
237. ns for for the TCP open request both passive and active TCP open request Changed position of The position of the node address setting switches was node address set changed The setting method and setting range are the same ting switches CJ1W as previously ETN21 only SECTION 2 Installation and Initial Setup This section explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation 2A Overview OF Startup Procedure a2 dw be eee ele ke eh wes koe Se eos eS 30 22 gt OWCA SeUINGS la a As AA 31 2 2 1 CS series Ethernet Units is ari A 31 2222 CJ seres Ethernet mistral dl aca bo at ai 32 2 3 Mounn tod PEC Ss ends idad 33 2 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC ooooooooooooooooooooo 33 2 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC oooooooooooooooooooooo 33 2 4 Network Installavoni cnn ccd ax loon A A AS AA 34 2 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions 0 0 0 c ee eee eee 34 2 4 2 Recommended Products 0 0 ccs 35 o SA O 35 2 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units 37 Za Connecting tothe Networks dion to wei nb doe OY cae eee eso Bee 38 2 5 0 Bihemet Connection shee eee ee 38 2 522 Connecting the Cables ia da ada 38 226 Creatine VO FTA eS 2 urls dass del diated did ide dd bearers 39 2 0 1 WO Table OVENI Woessner cated aa We aw ns owas Loos aa 39 2 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC 39 2 6 3 Proc
238. o caen el oe mj o 0 Default Transient pe Trenta Un Compare ssw Pen SetDefauts Cancel At the point where the Ethernet Unit is mounted and the I O tables has just been created the default values are in effect for all of the settings 42 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 5 Make the required settings i e the IP address in this case CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port TCPYIP keep alive f All 4 35650 f Default 9600 f Default 9600 0 min 0 default 11207 C AND 4 2650 C User defined C User defined IP Adde Performance of socket service q High Speed D Conversion Baud Rate f Auto dynamic T Aua ANS ICI Wee 7 Auto Static C AOBASE T Destination IP is changed dynamically 0 0 0 9 f Combined Destination IP is Not changed dynamically Sub net Mask Enable CIDR C IF address table C ETN11 compatible mode FTP IF Address Table IP Router Table Login Essence Port No lo 0 Detault 21 Lins Da LTrensfeflrittoPC _TrensfetPCto Uni Compare Sotsw Besin Set Defaute Cancel 6 Transfer the settings to the PLC Click on Yes in the following dialog box Edit Parameters t Farameters will be transferred to Unit e Do you want bo continues 7 In order for the Ethernet Unit Setup to go into effect
239. o use the CX Programmer s Unit setup to set the remote IP address for each connection The internal table is changed after connections are established The Ethernet Unit executes the following processing when the FINS TCP method is used Local Device Is FINS TCP Client 1 Connections are established in TCP IP protocol with the IP addresses set at the Unit i e the IP address for each connection No 2 The remote node i e the server is notified of the FINS node address for the local device 3 Notification is received from the remote node i e the server of the re mote node s FINS node address 4 The Ethernet Unit changes the internal table FINS node address IP ad dress and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received Local Device Is a FINS TCP Server 1 A request to open a connection is received in TCP IP protocol from the re mote device i e the client either a personal computer or an Ethernet Unit and the connection is established 2 Notification is received from the remote node i e the client of the remote node s FINS node address 3 The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address 4 The Ethernet Unit changes the internal node correspondence table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received 103 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Personal computer or Ethernet Unit client
240. oax ial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and their wiring as possible Contact outputs a Contact Output Unit a Ethernet Unit baa To transceiver hub 37 Connecting to the Network Section 2 5 2 5 Connecting to the Network 2 5 1 Ethernet Connectors The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted pair cable e Electrical specifications Conforming to IEEE802 3 standards e Connector structure RJ45 8 pin Modular Connector conforming to ISO 8877 Connectorpin Signal name Abbr Signal direction a Reception data Ros mmu C LUTO EIA ESO s Note E e Reseptiondata Ro m C E ESA e mosa e eo Hood Frame ground FG 2 5 2 Connecting the Cable N Caution Turn OFF the PLC s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twisted pair cable N Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted pair cable as shown in below 35 mm 1 2 3 1 Lay the twisted pair cable 2 Connect the cable to the hub Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place Request cable installation from a qualified professional 38 Creating I O Tables Section 2 6 3 Connect the cable to the connector on the Ethernet Unit Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place Example CS1W ETN21 RJ45 M
241. odular Connector Ethernet Unit 2 6 Creating I O Tables 2 6 1 I O Table Overview I O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC and to allocate I O to them With CS series and CJ series PLCs whenever there is a change to the Unit configuration it is necessary to create I O tables and register the Units to the CPU Unit The I O tables can be created in the following ways e Using the CX Programmer offline e Using the CX Programmer online with the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the Programming Console with the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the CPU Unit s automatic I O allocation at startup This method is available for the CJ Series only From here on operations involving the Programming Console are described 2 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC Applicable Programming Devices To create the I O tables connect a Programming Device such as a CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to the PLC The following Programming Devices can be used with CS CJ series PLCs Programming Console Model number Key Sheet required Recommended cable required CQM1 PROO1 E PROO1 E C200H PRO27 E CS1W KS001 E CS1W CN224 cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 cable length 6 0 m CS1W CN114 cable length 0 1 m CX Programmer Version 3 20 or Higher and CX Integrator The operations are explained here using a Programming Console For details regarding the CX Programmer and the CX Integrator refe
242. of received ICMP packets discarded because the type indica tion code was out of range 6 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall packet length value in the packet header was smaller than the minimum ICMP packet length 7 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect checksum value in the packet header 8 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP head er length value in the packet header did not match the lengths of individual header types 9 The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a response 10 Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input The 19 sta tistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Three types 46 items of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexa decimal value 1 Connection Information 60 Bytes Fifteen items are returned in the following sequence 1 The number of times active connections were correctly established 2 The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish a passive connection 3 The number of times active or passive connections were correctly estab lished 4 The number of times an established connection was cut off 5 The number of times the connection wait status was cut off Command Res
243. oltage is too Make sure that the correct voltage is low being supplied The Ethernet Unit is faulty Replace the Ethernet Unit The CPU Unit or Backplane is faulty Replace the CPU Unit or the Back plane The mounting screws on the Ethernet Tighten the mounting screws to the Unit are loose CS Series or the sliders specified torque CS Series or lock are not properly locked into place CJ the sliders into place CJ Series Series Not lit Lit Not lit The node address is set outside the cor Set the node address to between 01 rect range on the rotary switches and FE Hex The Ethernet Unit is faulty Restart the PLC If the problem per sists replace the Ethernet Unit Not lit Not lit Lit The unit number on the Ethernet Unit is Correct the unit number setting not set correctly on the rotary switch The I O tables are not registered in the Register the I O tables CPU Unit The same unit number is being used on Correct the unit number another Unit as well The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Lit Not lit There is no communications link with the If power is not turned ON to the hub hub turn it ON If there is crossed cable between the Ethernet Unit and the hub use straight cable Lit Lit There is a mistake in the Unit Setup or Read the error history and correct routing tables the data that is causing the error If the problem persists replace the
244. on DHCP cli addresses to send commands and receive responses ent by personal to the PLC and receive UDP IP By automatic generation computer responses dynamic IP address conversion method TCP IP Automatic FINS communi Not possible Possible with Automatic allocation by cations with per Ethernet Unit sonal computers Client FINS automatic node address allo without fixed cation function TCP IP only node addresses Handling TCP With FINS communications With FINS communications both UDP IP IP only UDP IP possible and TCP IP possible Simultaneous Not possible Possible with both UDP IP and TCP IP connection of multiple applica tions in a per sonal computer Mail functions Mail send function only E mail attachments with I O memory data are now possible for the mail send function SMTP client function file attachment func tion With the mail receive function commands can be received from the PLC POPS client function mail receive function munica tions service FTP server function The following features have been added to the TCP socket services function e Use of keep alive Socket services function e Number of bytes of data received for TCP socket Nos 1 to 8 e Status of TCP socket Nos 1 to 8 Data Received Flag Automatic clock information Not possible CPU Unit built in clock can be adjusted from adjustment SNTP server SNTP client function 27 Unit Version U
245. on is selected text files can be received Custom 1 to 3 If this option is selected files with extensions specified by the user can be received Receive Command Setting em Cotes Receive a specified com If this option is selected only specified Checked mand only remote mail commands are executed The commands to be received can be specified in the checkboxes below FileWrite Not checked FileReac fchecked fles can be read Checked FileDelete Not checked UMBackup If checked the user program can be Checked backed up PARAMBackup If checked the parameter area can be Checked backed up lOMWrite If checked writing to the I O memory Not checked area is permitted lOMRead If checked the I O memory area can be Checked read ChangeMode If checked the operating mode can be Not checked changed ErrorLogRead Checked ErrorLogClear Checked MailLogRead Checked MailLogClear Checked Test If checked the mail receive test can be Checked executed FinsSend If checked FINS commands can be Not checked executed 73 Auto Adjust Time Section 3 9 For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Man ual Construction of Applications 3 9 Auto Adjust Time IP Address Host Mame Port Ho Retry Timer Set Defaults SNTP Server Setup CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters Auto Adjustment Designation Method Time Lag Adjustment x FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Ad
246. onse timeouts may occasionally occur due to high traffic depending on the system configuration and the appli cation programs This section describes precautions for systems with high traffic in FINS communications Transmission delay command 0 0118 ms 0 1 ms m Conditions for High Traffic High traffic may occur if FINS messages from multiple communicating nodes are concentrated at a single Ethernet Unit The Ethernet Unit and the CPU Unit may have insufficient processing capacity for the volume of FINS mes sages commands that are coming from the network 155 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section 6 7 156 For example suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a sin gle FINS frame i e 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the Ethernet Unit until a response is sent If 100 or more FINS frames com mands are received at once from multiple communicating nodes it will take approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the last command If a time out is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less then a timeout will be gen erated A retry will begin due to the timeout and the traffic to the Ethernet Unit will thus be increased even further until ultimately the responses to all the nodes will be too slow At this point the system is overloaded m Avoiding Errors due to High Traffic To avoid high traffic from FINS communications the communications
247. or cleared from a Programming Device such as the CX Programmer or it can be read or cleared using FINS commands from a workstation or computer See 7 3 7 ERROR LOG READ and 7 3 8 ERROR LOG CLEAR Logged Errors The following errors are recorded in the error log e Errors in network operation e Errors in data transfers e Error in the CPU Unit 206 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Log Table Error Log Location FINS Commands for Error Logs Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table Up to 64 records can be saved If more than 64 errors occur the oldest errors will be deleted from the error log and the most recent error will be recorded The following information is recorded in the error log table e Main error code See table later in this section e Detailed error code See table later in this section e Time stamp from the clock in the CPU Unit When an error is detected the error codes and time stamp are recorded in the error log in RAM inside the Ethernet Unit Serious errors are also recorded in EEPROM The maximum number of errors that can be saved to EEPROM is 64 for the CS Series and 32 for the CJ Series The errors recorded in EEPROM will be saved even if the Unit is restarted or power is turned OFF When the Ethernet Unit is started the contents of the error log in EEPROM is copied to RAM When a FINS command is used to read the error log the log held in RAM is read When a FINS command is used
248. or occurs e When the operating mode is changed Interval If this option is selected mail is sent at fixed time Not checked time intervals The time interval in minutes can be set in the odic interval time box timer Mail address Select the destination mail address Address 1 The mail destination is the one set under the Mail Address tab Send Error Log _ If this option is selected the error log is included in Not checked information the body of the mail Send status infor If this option is selected status information is Not checked mation included in the body of the mail Send file data I O If this option is selected any of the following types Not checked e O memory data IOM e O memory data TXT e O memory data CSV ETN If this option is selected mail is sent whenever a__ Not checked condition new error is stored in the Ethernet Unit s error log Peri Send user data If this option is selected user created data is sent Not checked in the body of the mail The location for storing the user created data is set by the user defined mail address setting below memory data of data can be sent as file attachments to e mail e File data any file Select the type of data to be attached from the checkboxes below If I O memory data is selected then also select in I O memory data below the address and range of data to be sent Attached file If the above setting is checked so that files can be No
249. orrect for the POP3 and SMTP servers in the communications path e Are the Unit Setup and the mail addresses set for the servers correct e Are the destination mail addresses for remote mail commands correct e Has the network administrator set protection for mail addresses as a firewall From the response code response status refer to the section on receiving mail in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications and remove the cause of the error 225 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Clock Not being Automatically Adjusted START 226 Is the HOST indicator lit Is the HOST indicator flashing Is 03C6 stored in the Ethernet Unit s error log Is the SNTP error status bit ON Is the SNTP error status bit ON Is the ERH indicator The automatic clock adjustment function cannot be used because no IP address or host name is set for the SNTP Server Using the CX Programmer make the SNTP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SNTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or 127 e The SNTP server host name is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SNTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a co
250. ort number Data that was sent immediately before closing however is not checked for transmission to the remote node If the linger option is specified ensure the arrival of the send data in the application The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes An available TCP port number is automatically assigned if O is speci fied The TCP port numbers allocated to the open socket are stored in the Results Storage Area The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit s communications services can not be specified e TCP port No used for FTP server Default 20 21 e TCP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 e TCP port No used for SMTP server access Default 25 e TCP port No used for POP server access Default 110 e TCP port No used for HTTP server Default 80 Specify the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Specify the remote TCP port number must be non zero Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes Response code Description 1100 TCP socket number i
251. pecified if the broadcast address is specified as the send destination The results storage area stores the actual number of bytes sent Specifies the data sent to the remote node 0000 0105 Local IP address setting error 0302 CPU Unit error execution not possible 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description 1003 The number of bytes sent does not match the sent data length 1100 UDP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of range The destination IP address is 0 Local UDP port number is 0 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 2240 Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS 0042 The send destination IP address is a broadcast address and the number of bytes sent exceeds 1 472 EMSGSIZE 004C Incorrect network number Incorrect destination IP address EADDRNOTAVAIL 004E Incorrect destination IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table Router incorrectly set 0051 Router incorrectly specified Incorrect destination IP address EHOSTUNREACH 7 3 12 UDP CLOSE REQUEST Requests processing to close a socket
252. period For example the binary address 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130 58 17 32 Note The same network number must be set for every node on the same Ethernet network 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses IP Internet Protocol is a standard communications protocol used throughout the world and is designed to enable communications between any Ethernet nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist To achieve this net work numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services to ensure that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regard less of where they exist The local system administrator is left the responsibil ity of allocating unique host numbers locally You therefore should obtain a network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure unique ness and allow for future network expansions if required 94 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 3 Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings An IP address must be set even for the Ethernet Unit before Ethernet commu nications can proceed Either use the default for the Ethernet Unit s IP address or else use a peripheral device to set it in the DM Area words allo cated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit or in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup For details refer to 2 7 Unit Setup Procedure 5 1 4 Subnet Masks 5 1 5 CIDR Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too many nodes are connected on a single
253. pgrade Information Section 1 8 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Information 28 The details of the upgrade to the Ethernet Unit version are as follows E Unit Version 1 3 Upgrade RS Web function added The unit settings and status monitoring for the Ethernet Unit can be easily performed from a Web browser Function prohibiting Access to change the remote IP address from a node using access using FINS FINS UDP can be prohibited IP address protection UDP from nodes with dynamically changed IP addresses m Unit Version 1 4 Upgrade as O O ETN11 compatible A mode compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 was mode added to the added in the operating specifications for FINS UDP messages ETN21 settings for sent from a different UDP port number than the FINS UDP FINS UDP port number set in the Ethernet Unit E Unit Version 1 5 Upgrade oas Added CIDR function An option setting has been added to the subnet mask settings to subnet mask set to enable CIDR Enabling CIDR enables using the IP address tings with classless subnet mask settings Added option for Enabling high speed socket services improves the perfor high speed socket mance of sending and receiving for socket services using spe services cific bits If high speed socket services are disabled performance is the same as previously Added linger option It is possible to specify the linger option in the option settings to socket optio
254. pleted i e when a connection has been made TCP Active Open Active TCP socket opened when switch is Request Switch turned ON o Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been completed i e when a connection has been made Send Request User Send processing executed when switch is Switch turned ON The protocol a is determined when the socket is opened Unit Unit turns OFF switch when send processing has been completed Receive Request User Receive processing executed when switch is Switch turned ON The protocol rial is determined when the socket is opened Unit Unit turns OFF switch when receive process ing has been completed Close Request User Close processing executed when switch is turned ON The protocol ar is determined when the socket is opened Unit Unit turns OFF switch when close processing been S Wotused emea o o o oo FINS TCP Connection Status 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 n 23 85 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 These bits show the status of FINS TCP connections ln bad Manipulated Unit operation Reference by FINS TCP Connec ON Unit Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is SECTION 6 tion No 1 established FINS Commu Unit Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec ON Unit Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is tion No 2 established Unit Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection C ter
255. ponse Reference Section 7 3 6 The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated structures were released 7 The number of segments for the round trip time time from segment trans mission to ACK The number of times the round trip time was changed 9 The number of times a delayed acknowledgement ACK was sent If the order of the received segments is reversed ACK is sent with a packet of data separate from ACK response to input data etc or is immediately sent with the ACK for other data 10 The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was re turned after several resend attempts 11 The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set time The resend timer sets the maximum time limit between the data be ing output and ACK being returned 12 The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time set on the duration timer The duration timer sets the maximum time limit for a window advertisement to be received if the transmission window is smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set If no window ad vertisement is received within the time limit the number of segments per mitted by the transmission window are sent If the transmission window is set to 0 a window probe 1 octet of data is sent before the timer restarts 13 The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set on the hold timer 14 The number of ti
256. quire CX Programmer version 5 0 or higher for setting 1 2 3 1 Connect the CX Programmer online The CX Programmer can be connected to the PLC in either of the following ways a Connect the personal computer to the PLC by serial cable through ei ther a peripheral port or RS 232C port b Connect the personal computer to the PLC by Ethernet When Ethernet Unit is registered in the I O tables in the CPU Unit the Ethernet Unit will operate using the default IP address 192 168 250 node_number This default IP address can be used initially to connect online For details on connecting the CX Programmer to the PLC by serial cable refer to the CX Programmer operation manual For details on connecting the CX Programmer to the PLC by Ethernet re fer to 6 5 Using FINS Applications Use the mouse to select O table in the Project Window Either double click or right click to display the Properties Menu and select Open The I O Table Window will then be displayed 1 PLC I0 Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help el Sila ejeje col ele ra fs Inner Board S 0000 Main Rack dy 0000 Rack 01 dy 0000 Rack 02 fs 0000 Rack 03 es 0000 Rack 04 fs 0000 Rack 05 e 0000 Rack 06 e 0000 Rack OF Cs1H CPU67H Offline 41 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 3 Read the I O tables from the PLC and select the Rack to which the Ether net Unit is mounted
257. r Access Interval o min 0 Default 5 LTrensfefUrittoPt Trastero Unid Compare Sotsw_ estat SetDefauts Cancel C nem TO De Designation Select whether the POP3 server used for receiving IP Address Method mail is to be specified by IP address or the host s domain name i e host name IP Address Set the IP address for the POPS server used for 0 0 0 0 receiving mail This setting is enabled only when IP address is selected as the method for specifying the server Host Name Set the host domain name i e the host name for None the POP3 server that is to be used for receiving mail This setting is enabled only when host name is selected as the method for specifying the server Port No Set the port to be used for connecting to the POP3 0 server that is to be used for receiving mail Number 110 This setting does not normally need to be changed S used Account Name Set the account name to be used for sending and receiving mail Only alphanumeric characters can be used If no account name is set the portion of the local e mail address to the left of the will be used Mail Password Set a password for the account that is to be used None for sending and receiving mail Server Access Set the interval for sending and receiving mail Mail 0 Interval will be automatically sent and received at the inter 5 minutes val set here For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receiv
258. r the SMTP POP3 server Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Q Mail software IAS Receiving e mail E mail ee Internet y Intranet Firewall Server room i Office floor i a l _ Y DNS server Q Mail software POP3 server 4 7 UN SMTP server a A i l o SNTP server at LN Ethernet Ethernet _ Router o i z l o A A A oe E o eee A 0 dl AA Production line Sending E a e mail 13 l l l l l l l l E IO O N S remun l l l l o l l l l l l Monitoring PLC changes and i sending equipment status to PLC s I O memory data the operator by e mail sent as attached file A A A A A a ENEE R E E E E E EE E ee l Reference SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Receiving E mail Data and Files at the PLC Operation Use the mail receive function When the mail receive function is used the PLC can be accessed through a mail address enabling remote applications via the Internet to be constructed relatively easily With the mail receive function any of the following remote commands can be specified as e mail subjects e FileWrite File Write e ChangeMode Operating Mode FileRead File Read Change e FileDelete File Delete e ErrorLogRead Error Log Read e FileList File List Read e ErrorLogClear Error Log Clear e UMBackup User Memory e MailLogRead
259. r to the CX Pro grammer User s Manual Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 for connection procedures and operating procedures for the CX Integrator CX Integrator is software that comes with CX One and is automatically installed when CX One is installed 39 Creating I O Tables Section 2 6 Connecting Programming To connect a Programming Console attach a CS CJ series Key Sheet and Devices then connect the Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port It cannot be con nected to the RS 232C port 2 6 3 Procedure for Creating l O Tables The procedure for creating I O tables is shown here taking as an example I O tables that is generated automatically for a PLC connected online In this example a Programming Console is used for creating the I O tables For an explanation of how to create l O tables using a CX Programmer refer to the CX Programmer User s Manual Use the following procedure to create the I O tables Note With the CJ Series it is necessary to create I O tables only when I O alloca tion is performed by the user With the CS Series it is always necessary to create I O tables CH xDM Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup 40 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 2 7 Unit Setup Procedure 2 1 Using the CX Programmer Use the CX Programmer Ver 3 20 or higher for the Ethernet Unit Setup and follow the procedure described below Some functions added with unit version 1 3 re
260. rator 3 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing this function 4 Mail may not always be delivered Depending on factors such as the con dition of the network mail that has been sent may not arrive at its desti nation 21 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 22 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function The Ethernet Unit can acquire clock information from the SNTP server at a particular time or when a dedicated bit turns ON and it can refresh the inter nal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted SNTP server Ethernet a Ethernet Unit CS CJ series I AA CPU Unit Note 1 An SNTP server is required to use this function 2 SNTP server settings require specialized knowledge so they should al ways be handled by the network administrator 3 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing 4 When using the Internet depending on the condition of the network it may not be possible to acquire the clock information Specifying Servers by Host Name POP servers SMTP servers and SNTP servers can be specified by host name rather than by IP address by using of the DNS client function DNS server OOOO OOOO DD DDD DDD ORD O IP address Host name Ethernet Ethernet Unit CS CJ series LZ CPU Unit Note A DNS server is required to specify servers by host name
261. rd Login Password eccecese OMRON Ethernet unit Settings Wenu 1 IF address and Protocols o System a ETE o DMS 5 The settings in the System menu will be displayed The following window shows the default system settings 3 Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back o x 12 gt 7 Search y lo Favorites LA Address http 192 168 250 1 0 OMRON Ethernet unit System Format Settings Parameter TP address 0 10 0 Net mask 0 0 0 0 enable CIDR 1 IP address and Protocols FINS UDP Port 0 C Use Input Port No Default 9600 o System Menu FINS TCP Port 0 LJ Use Input Port No Default 9600 Auto Dynamic Auto Static O Manual Auto amp Manual Destination IP address is changed dynamically FINS UDP option Destination IP address is Not changed dynamically TP address router table OETN11 compatible mode o IP address table Broad cast option all 1 4 3BSD O all 0 4 2BSD TP router tabl E ES PER Baud Rate Auto O 10BASE T o Connection 1 8 TCP IP keep alive 0 min 0 default 120 o Connection 9 16 7 Send Mail Performance of socket service High Speed o Mail address FINS TCP Protected C o Send Mail SMTP Server O Host name IP address Receive Mail as ae POP Server O Host name IP address SNTP Server O Host name IP address Address conversion mode Internet 45 B
262. red in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory turn the power to the PLC system OFF and ON again or restart the Ethernet Unit J LLL ci Option 252 Numerics 100M indicator 26 A Account Name field 68 applications precautions xxiii ARP communications 16 ASCII characters 241 Attached file name field 71 Auto Adjust Time Tab 52 74 Auto allocated FINS node field 65 automatic 8 automatic clock adjustment 8 10 22 52 Auxiliary Area 138 baud rate CJ series 14 CS series 14 setting 49 Baud Rate field 63 Bit value change field 71 bits addresses 90 160 error status 83 205 service status 82 status of UDP TCP sockets 80 BROADCAST DATA SEND 166 Broadcast field 62 broadcast setting 49 broadcast test command 166 reading results 166 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 166 buffers 196 235 configuration 237 C C200H PRO27 E 39 cables communications xxv Index connections 38 installation 37 precautions 35 twisted pair 11 CJ series 14 CS series 14 cascade connections 36 CJ series 14 CS series 14 ChangeMode command 6 73 CIO Area 138 allocations 78 CJIW ETN11 comparison 27 compatibility 54 clock automatic adjustment 8 10 22 52 Close Request Switch 85 Closing Flag 80 CMND 490 instruction 8 17 19 141 commands FINS commands 158 remote 6 ChangeMode 6 ErrorLogClear 6 ErrorLogRead 6 FileDelete 6 FileList 6
263. red in the Ethernet to the flash mem ory non volatile memory of the CPU Unit The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory non volatile memory when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted Therefore when making the unit set tings using the Web function always click the Set Button before the Regist Button Otherwise the entered set values will not be used The Set Button and Regist Button are provided on the window for each setting item Note To prevent unauthorized Web access the Web function can be disabled Select HTTP Option and deselect the Use Web Function option Click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button This setting is enabled by turning ON the power to the Ethernet Unit again or restarting the Unit This setting can be cancelled only through the CX Programmer Unit Setup version 5 0 or higher EDIL LO ETAT aL O Use WEB Function Ser Cancel I Regist I Reload 8 The functions of the other button are as follows e Cancel Button Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was previously set with the Set But ton again If the Set Button has not been clicked the value that was read from the CPU Unit s flash mem ory non volatile memory when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed e Reload Button Use this button read and display the values saved in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory 9 To enable the unit settings that have been registe
264. rences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades Notation of Unit Versions The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the on Products products for which unit versions are being managed as shown below omrRon csiw O0 OO UNIT ff Product nameplate Unit version Example for unit version 1 3 Lot No 0404070000 Ver 1 3 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Confirming Unit Versions CX Programmer version 4 0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the with Support Software Unit Manufacturing Information Note The unit versions of Pre Ver 2 0 Units cannot be confirmed Unit Manufac turing Information The following dialog box is displayed PLC 10 Table E xj AN Failed to read Manufacturing Information For this Unit Location In the O Table Window right click and select Unit Manufacturing informa tion CPU Unit The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed Unit Manufacturing Information ax File Help Manufacturing Details Revision Number PCB Revision Number BE Software Revision Number E jo Lot Number Serial Number Unit version EN Manufacturing ID EJ To TE Unit Version Number Unit Text CIIM CPU23 Run Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the Unit connected online vi Using Unit Version Label The following unit version label is provided with the Ethernet Unit This label can be
265. ress FINS UDP By pairing FINS IP address Automatic gen Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed node addresses with conversion eration method IP addresses in static Ethernet Automatic gen Fixed Fixed or Fixed Fixed eration method variable dynamic P address table Fixed Fixed or Fixed Fixed method variable Combined Fixed Fixed or Fixed Fixed method variable FINS TCP By automatic conver Automatic Connection Fixed or Fixed or Fixed Fixed sion of FINS node method auto can be allo variable addresses at Ether matic FINS cated auto net Unit and remote node address matically node and then conversion when not sending and receiv determined ing data 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses There are two kinds of IP addresses private and global e Global addresses These are IP addresses that connect directly to the Internet Allocated by application to NIC each address is unique in the world and as many as 4 3 million can be allocated worldwide e Private addresses These are IP addresses for Intranet LAN use and cannot connect directly to the Internet Frames that include private IP addresses are restricted by the router from being sent outside the LAN Generally as shown below global addresses in the intranet are allocated only to IP routers such as broadband routers interfacing with the Internet All other nodes in the intranet including the Ethernet Unit are allocated private
266. ress not specified 0044 ENOPROTOOPT Protocol not available unsupported option specified 0045 ECONNABORTED Software caused connection abort another task closed socket 0046 EINPROGRESS Operation now in progress non block connection ended during pro cessing 0047 ENOTSOCK Socket operation on non socket 0048 EOPNOTSUPP Operation not supported on socket 0049 EADDRINUSE Address already in use UDP or Check the port number TCP open request sent for port TCP ports can remain unusable for 1 min after already in use closing 004A ECONNREFUSED Connection refused TCP socket Passively open a remote TCP socket checking active open processing refused by the remote IP address and remote TCP port remote node number 004B ECONNRESET Connection reset by peer TCP Close the local socket and try reconnecting socket closed by remote node 004C EADDRNOTAVAIL Can t assign requested address Check the setting of the remote IP address and mistake in remote IP address try reconnecting 004D EAFNOSUPPORT Address family not supported by Close the local socket and try reopening it protocol family 004E ENETUNREACH Network is unreachable Set the path to the remote node in the IP router table 004F EHOSTDOWN Check the remote host and communications path 0050 EWOULDBLOCK __ Operation would block Close the local socket and try reopening it 0051 EHOSTUNREACH No route to host The specified node does not exist on the desig Check
267. ress or the host s domain name i e host name IP Address Set the IP address for the SMTP server used for sending mail This setting is enabled only when IP address is selected as the method for specifying the server Host Name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SMTP server that is to be used for send ing mail This setting is enabled only when host name is selected as the method for specifying the server Port No Set the port to be used for connecting to the 0 SMTP server that is to be used for sending mail No 25 is used This setting does not normally need to be changed Local Mail Set the mail address for the Ethernet Unit None Address Use POP before Select whether or not to use the mail receiving Not checked method POP before SMTP in which the POP server must be accessed to receive mail before the SMTP server is accessed to send mail For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 67 POP Section 3 5 3 5 POP POP Server Setup 68 CS1W ETN21 ETN21Mode Edit Parameters FI Setting FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Mail Send Mail Receive Clock Auto Adiustme 4 gt POP Server Setting Designation Method F Address C Host name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Host Name WAN Port No O 0 Defao Account Hame Not set Default Use local mall addre Mail Password Change Serve
268. ress set in the CPU Unit Bus System Setup set as desired i e tem Setup System Setup is stored in the allocated The default settings are not used words in the DM Area Replacing the previous CS1W The IP address is set using a rotary ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 and using switch in the previous CS1W ETNO1 the previous settings CS1W ETN11 Ethernet Units In the new Ethernet Units the IP address set with the rotary switch is displayed in the DM Area This area is backed up by the battery so the IP address can be used without resetting Note If a value other than 00 00 00 00 is set as the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup even if an IP address is set in the allocated words in the DM Area it will be overwritten with the setting in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup 2 It is not possible to set the following IP addresses If any of these values are set the ERH indicator will flash e IP addresses where all network number bits are O or 1 e IP addresses where all host number bits are O or 1 e P addresses where all subnet number bits are 1 e IP addresses that start with 127 7F hexadecimal e g 127 35 21 16 89 Auxiliary Area Data 4 3 Auxiliary Area Data The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the Auxiliary Area of PLC memory that are related to the Ethernet Unit Read only Bits Words Word s Bits Name Function _ _ _ A202 A202 00to Communications A202 07 Port Enab
269. rference such as installing network components in grounded metal cases using optical links in the system etc 34 Network Installation Section 2 4 2 4 2 Recommended Products The following products are recommended for use with the CS1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit Model Specifications number Hub 100BASE TX SWITCH 10 100 Mbit s 5 port hub 5TX 10BASE T MR820TLX_ 9 port hub with 10Base 5 Allied Telesis backbone port 0120 86 0442 in Japan only Twisted pair 100BASE TX cable Fujikura STP shielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P__ pair cable Category 5 5e Note Impedance is lim ited to 100 Q Fujikura CTP LAN5 UTP unshielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P pair cable Category 5 5e 10BASE T Fujikura STP shielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P pair cable Category 3 4 5 5e Note Impedance is lim ited to 100 Q Fujikura CTP LAN5 UTP unshielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P pair cable Category 3 4 5 5e Connectors STP Plug Modular Panduit MPS588 plug Corp UTP Plug Panduit MP588 C Corp Precautions on Laying Twisted pair Cable 2 4 3 Precautions Basic Precautions e Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub and the Ethernet Unit e After laying the twisted pair cable check the connection with a 10Base T cable tester Environment Precautions e The UTP cable is not shielded and the hub is designed for use in OA environments In environments subject to noise cons
270. rge 7 3 3 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the controller status 06 01 Command code Command Response Error flags Total number Total number Total number Total number Total number code code of of of of of packets received receive errors packets sent errors sent send collisions 163 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Error Flags Response Indicates the operating status and errors that occurred when the Ethernet Unit was started Bit 02 IP address error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error The cause of each error is listed below IP Address Error All bits for the network number or host number are setto 0 or 1 IP Address Table Error More than 32 records exist in the IP address table IP Router Table Error More than 8 records exist in an IP router table DNS Server Error e There is an error in the IP address setting for the DNS server e Atimeout was generated in communications with the DNS server Routing Table Error Local network table contains O or more than 16 records Relay network table contains more than 20 records SNTP Server error e There is an error in the setting for the SNTP server host specification i e the IP address or the host name e A timeout was generated in communic
271. rias Ak wR a ed eee 161 A RESE A E 161 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ 0 0 ccc eens 162 7 3 3 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 0050 163 7 3 4 INTERNODE ECHO TEST 0 0 ccc cee eens 165 7 3 5 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 166 7 3 6 BROADCAST DATA SEND 0 00 cc eens 166 7 7 ERROR LOG READ vse ceed cea heute h Sie See EE ds 167 138 ERROR LOG CLEAR outra tit 168 1239 UDP OPEN REQUEST ccs vad ew bd ark ed eda REA CORRES 169 7 53 10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST ria 170 7 3 11 UDP SEND REQUEST sprecano dhrn ccc eee eens 172 7 32 12 JDP CLOSE REQUEST oasis et tad etn 173 7 3 13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST vasca a 174 7 3 14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST 00 cee eens 177 7 37 15 TCP RECBIVE REQUEST wi2 446 d46 46 hoe ia 180 T16 TEPSEND REQUEST correa daa 181 TI TCP CLOSE REQUEST tae 183 SAS PING ii dada dada 184 7 3 19 FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 185 7 3 20 FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ 186 7 3 21 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE o o oocococccoooooo 187 713222 IPADDRESS WRETE 0 cintia ai acia 189 7 3 23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 0 0 0 ccc cee eens 189 7 3 24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 0 0 2 0 ee eee 191 7 3 25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 0 0 0 00 eee 192 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ aissa picaren cc eens 196 1 322 SOCKET STATUS READ os ode eae obs wae beeen eee 198 7 3 28 ADDRESS INFORMATION RE
272. riorate due to extreme operating condition Therefore it is important to inspect the Unit regularly Inspection Interval Normally inspect once or twice per year Choose the inspection period according to the severity of the operat ing conditions New installation should be inspected more frequently until they are judged to be stable Inspection Items Correct any of the items in the table below not conforming to the specified standard a tas T Emironmen Transceiver cable connector fully pushed in Condition of transceiver cable No visible abnormality Twisted pair cable connector fully pushed in Mounting Ethernet Unit firmly attached Condition of twisted pair cable No visible abnormality Tools Required for Inspection The following tools are needed to inspect the Ethernet Unit Standard Tools e Flat blade and Phillips screwdrivers e Tester or digital voltmeter e Industrial alcohol and a clean cloth Tools Required Under Special Circumstances e Synchroscope e Pen oscilloscope e Thermometer and hygrometer 245 Inspections Appendix F 246 Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function Web Function Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later can use a Web browser from a personal computer or other device to easily make the Ethernet Unit s system settings and monitor statuses Web Function List The information displayed on the window from the Web browser for the Ethernet Unit is as follows Unit Setup Functions
273. rocessing has been completed Ce A E E 3 ON Unit ON when data from a remote node Operation Manual Con has been received at an open TCP socket struction of Applica tions SECTION 6 OFF when receive processing has been requested for an open TCP socket 14 Results Storage i ON if there is an error in storing the Error Flag results when socket services are used by means of the CMND 490 instruction OFF Unit Turns OFF when the next request is received Connected oy TCP TCP UDP Open Flag OFF when close processing has been completed Stays OFF for abnormal open processing comple tion Note The status of these flags can also be checked using the software switch set tings on the CX Programmer 80 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Opening Flag Bit 00 Turns ON when an open request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the open process ing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Opening Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation Receiving Flag Bit 01 Turns ON if the High Speed Option is not selected when a receive request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction Remains OFF if the High Speed Option is selected Turns OFF again when the receive processing has been completed Whe
274. rors CRC errors frame length errors received frame 1 515 bytes or more and communications controller overflow errors The total number of packets sent by the Ethernet Unit is returned The total number of packet errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was send ing is returned The number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes during Ethernet Unit transmissions Counting of the total number of packets received total number of receive errors total number of packets sent total number of errors sent and total number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value reaches the maximum value 0000 1001 Command too large INTERNODE ECHO TEST Runs the echo test between specified nodes Command Test data code 08 01 DI 1 998 bytes max Command Response Test data code code 165 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Test Data Command Response Precautions Response Codes Command Block Response Block Parameters Times Received Response Response Codes 166 This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 998 bytes can be specified The response sends back data identical to the data specified in the command An abnormality is assumed if the data returned in the response differs from the test data sent The test destination node is the destination node specified in the CMND 194 instruction operands Always specify the uni
275. rrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 7 3 18 PING Command Block 184 0000 Equivalent processing to the UNIX computer PING command see below Command Destination IP address Timeout code value Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Block Parameters Destination IP Address Command Timeout Value Command Remarks Response Codes Ay Command Response code code The IP address in hexadecimal of the destination node for the PING com mand echo request packet The wait time for the echo reply packet The value is set in seconds The tim eout time is set at 20 seconds if the value is specified as O If the echo reply packet is not received within the set time limit the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code PING Command The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol When the PING command is executed an echo request packet is sent to the remote node ICMP Correct communications are confirmed when the returned response packet is received normally The echo reply packet is automatically returned by the remote node ICMP 1002 Command too small 1100 Zero destination address 220F PING command currently being executed High traffic at Unit cannot execute service
276. rrectly set 004F see note Received ICMP data EHOSTDOWN 0051 see note Received ICMP data EHOSTUNREACH Router incorrectly set 0053 A communications error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT 0066 Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service 0080 A receive request timeout error occurred 0081 Socket was closed while receiving Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks 7 3 16 TCP SEND REQUEST Requests that data be received at a TCP socket 181 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Command Results storage area Number of Data sent code bytes sent Command Block TCP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Results Storage Format BEEE Response Number of code bytes sent Response Block Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to O TCP Socket Number The TCP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and Command 8 Results Storage Area The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first Command byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Number of Bytes Sent The number of bytes in the data sent specified between O an
277. rsonal Computer In communications involving previous models multiple communications appli cations were configured on personal computers according to data accessing uses and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS commu nications could be used on any given computer created a problem This Ethernet Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs remote nodes applications with FINS node addresses enabling dynamic changes FINS UDP FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer Communications Method and the respective FINS UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually When FINS UDP FINS commands are sent from individual appli cations to the Ethernet Unit the respective remote IP addresses and remote port numbers in the internal table are dynamically changed FINS TCP With this method as well FINS nodes are allocated individually for each appli Communications Method cation on the computer and the respective FINS TCP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually Each application is positioned with a FINS TCP client and requests the opening of a connection with the Ethernet Unit s FINS TCP server When the connection is established the respective remote IP address and remote port number in the internal table are dynami cally changed 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Dyna
278. ry access Parallel processing with 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I O U CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Note CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is given Time slice peripheral servicing priority execution time Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle N Parallel processing with syn Set peripheral servicing time chronous memory access Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with 1 ms max asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than those calculated with the methods given here Among the causes of longer delays are the following traffic on the network window sizes at network nodes traffic through the Ethernet Unit e g socket servicing FTP server communications etc and the system configuration Example Calculations
279. s Not used always 0 Not used always 0 The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re assembly queue headers i The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses j Not used always 0 k The number of short buffers used for storing socket options The number of short buffers used for storing access rights m The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses 3 Long Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes a The number of long buffers currently being used b The number of long buffers in the system fixed at 64 decimal 4 Not Used Always 0 4 bytes 5 Network Memory Application Two items are returned a The number of bytes used in K bytes b The percentage used 6 Memory Exhaustion Log 12 bytes Counts for the following values indicate a high load on the Ethernet Unit These high loads may be caused by problems in communications partic ularly FINS communications and UDP sockets If these values are consis tently high check your applications sa gt o 197 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Precautions Response Codes a The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer without WAIT when there were no short buffers available b The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer with WAIT when there were no short buffers available c The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a short buffer already
280. s transitions ASCII characters maintenance and inspections The related Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications W421 provides the follow ing information Section SCSC SCSCSCSCCmtents Overview of functions for constructing applications Section 2 Information on using mail functions to automatically send I O memory data from OMRON PLCs to personal computers Section 3 Information on using mail functions to send commands from OMRON PLCs to per sonal computers Information on transferring large files between personal computers and OMRON PLCs Information on automatically adjusting the OMRON PLC s built in clock Section 6 Information on communicating between general applications applications not using FINS and OMRON PLCs Section 7 Information on using personal computer and UNIX machine socket interfaces to cre ate applications using FINS communications xiii Relevant Manuals The following table lists CS and CJ series manuals that contain information relevant to Ethernet Units Manual Contents number W420 CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 W421 CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 W343 CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 W342 CS1G H CPULILIH CS1G H CPU LILIEV1 CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ1M CPULIL CS1W SCU21 V1 CS1W SCB21 V1 41 V1 CJ1G H CPULILJH CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G CPULI CJ1W SCU21 V1 41 V1 W339 CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU W393 CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPUL
281. s or high ten sion lines e Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra dius e Do not pull on the communications cables e Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables e Always lay communications cable inside ducts e Use appropriate communications cables e Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in malfunc tion or damage e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PLC including the setting of the startup operation mode e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory 6 Conformance to EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive 6 2 Concepts EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depen
282. s out of range Remote IP address or the remote TCP port number is 0 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 1103 Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area The specified socket connection is already open or is being opened 220F 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 2240 Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used with a CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 Normal 000D A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EACCES 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 004A An error occurred ECONNREFUSED Passive remote is not available 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004C A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EAD DRNOTAVAIL A parameter was specified incorrectly An attempt was made to actively open local TCP port 004E A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table or incorrect router setting 0051 A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOSTUNREACH Incorrect router setting 0053 A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT No remote exists 0081 Socket was closed during opening procedure Note Thes
283. sed as middleware when constructing communications applications on a personal computer for a FINS network using Visual C or Visual BASIC The CX Programmer and CX Integrator can also be connected online through FinsGateway When FINS UDP is used in the FINS communi cations service all versions of FinsGateway can be used When FINS TCP is used in the FINS communications service only FinsGate way Version 2003 or higher can be used System Configuration Section 1 3 When the CX Programmer and CX Integrator are connected online by FINS TCP FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher must be used For CX Programmer Ver 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly con nect to the PLC online Personal computer running Windows User created software CX Programmer FinsGateway Ethernet Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit 13 Specifications Section 1 4 1 4 Specifications 1 4 1 General Specifications CS series Ethernet Unit E i nemo Specifications Model number CS1W ETN21 100Base TX Can be used as 10Base T Transmission media Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Categories 5 5e Categories 3 4 5 5e Shielded twisted pair STP cable Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Categories 100 Q at 3 4 5 5e 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade con No restrictions if switching hubs are used
284. send collisions occurred Go to Network Connection Problems E N D 218 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Opening Problems Opening Problems occurred Are you attempting an active open Y Use an active open at the Is the passive open remote node not finishing Is the response Read socket status using code in the results storage the FINS command READ area a value other SOCKET STATUS than 00492 Make sure that the same port number is not being used Y simultaneously by more than one process including FTP services Sockets can remain in ESTABLISHED or some later status even if closed be sure to close ports from both sides of the connection Does the port number being used exist at the local node A socket can remain open in TIME WAIT status for up to one minute on the side that closes the socket first we recommend that the active side port number be set to O and that you close the socket from the active side If you are using the Socket Service Request Switches check the response code to see if it is 0049 Hex Return to General Problems Closing Problems Refer to General Problems on page 218 219 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Reception Problems Reception problems occurred If you are using the Socket Service Request Switches check the response code to see if it is other than 0000 Hex Is reception processing not
285. ssing time response v g Transmission Delays Transmission Delays i command response i Reception processing Transmission Y time command processing time response CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle remote node Maximum transmission delay Maximum transmis CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node 1 sion delay time CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 1 Transmission processing time command Transmission delay command Reception processing time command CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Transmission processing time response Transmission Delays response Reception processing time response CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node 2 CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 1 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser chronous memory access vicing time for each Special I O ie CPU Bus Unit peripheral Parallel processing with port RS 232C port or Inner Board asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation
286. stallation and Initial Setup oooooooo o 29 2e Overview 01 Startup Procedure ardor vote dy dons dis cidad 30 222 MUCHA SELINA crass ie ASCE Ue eee eee ee eke Cee es 31 225 Mount Motoa PEG adas aus dos 33 24 Network Installations a A AA A AS 34 2 5 Conncotino tothe Networks nia re CRS OCS eee ee ee Kee da as 38 220 Creatine VO Tables ni A diosas 39 Zed mit Setup Procedure A da 41 2 5 BASI ELIMINA A A 46 2 9 Unit Setup for Particular Applications oooooooooorrrrr eee teen eens 50 2 10 Commtimicatons Tests is oon eee eee ic 32 2 11 Converting from Previous Models is AAA A eae 54 SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup oooooooooooooooo 61 dl SUD oda a ide Stila aes 62 oo AINS TOP diari AS 64 A O REA 66 Se MTB taa adidas 67 De OD Bato tag O oe ee ee ae ee Cee ete eee eee 68 O AA O het eigen Stee reo wt eS Gs Sea sd Tate SG Ee 69 0 Gane ee geet A 70 J8 Receive Malein Seco ts atada la hada 72 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 9 ATOA TIME deidad iberia ds 74 A A O ha ee Meee hares Saeed hates A 75 SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory AllocationNs oooooooo 77 dal ClO Area Aoc aenean da is N 78 422 DIM Area AllOCatiOnS a dd a es E 86 423 AURA Area Didi oh oe da hanes as 90 SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses ccccccccescesceeee 93 Sk RAG CROSS ya A AR owes are ba kates 94 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 0 0 ccc eee e eens 96 5 5 Private and
287. sults Storage Area Precautions Response Codes The maximum control time between receiving the open request and storing the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0 Specify the remote node s IP address If all zeroes are set no remote node is specified and connection is awaited from any node If any other value is set connection is awaited from the specified remote node The IP address of the connected remote node will be stored in the results storage area Specify the remote TCP port number with this command If all zeroes are set no remote TCP port number is specified If any other value is set it specifies the TCP port number of the remote node The TCP port number of the con nected remote node will be stored in the results storage area Processing varies as shown in the table below according to the specified combination of remote IP address and remote TCP port number Remote IP address Remote TCP port io isis All connection requests received Not 0 Received only when port number matches Not 0 Received only when IP address matches Not 0 Not 0 Received only when IP address and port number matches 1002 1100 TCP socket number is out of range O ropero mo 220F The specified socket connection is already open or is cur rently being opened
288. t 117 6 2 RINSAUIDE Method iii dd 118 Ol O A A eee 118 63 JBINS TC PVieth OG ticos ici DA ates E eee 120 G55 OVEIVIEW O ant aeenteonneeudddaeudagade 120 6 4 Creating Routing Tables vaccine iia dde 124 6 4 1 Routing Table Overview 0 0 0 oo 124 6 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 125 6 4 3 Routing Table Setting ExamplesS o oooooooooo 126 6 5 Using FINS Applications ooooooooooooronorornnna 128 6 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server 0 0 0 0 0c cece eee 128 0 32 PIMs Gale Waits wad ote Beads Spc dia de tone deemed 132 6 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 0 00 cee eee 137 6 6 1 Communications Specifications 0 0 0 eee 137 6 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas oooooooomoooo 138 6 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 139 6 6 4 Wane PrOSTAMS 0 ARE AR 143 6 6 5 Program Example o oooooooocorocononoooo 147 6 6 6 Transmission DelayS o ooooooooooorooroo oo o 149 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 155 115 Overview of FINS Communications Section 6 1 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications 6 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network Data is sent and received as UDP IP packets or TCP IP packets on an Ether net network PLC Ethernet Unit or host computer Packet FINS command Ethernet Packet FINS response
289. t Mask For the subnet mask all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used as either the net number or the subnet number are set to 1 and the bits corre sponding to the host number are set to 0 These settings must be made when using an address conversion method other than the IP address table method Starting from unit version 1 5 it is possible to use classless inter domain rout ing by enabling CIDR Enabling CIDR enables setting 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 for the subnet mask regardless of the IP address class Sub netdas q W Enable CIDA 48 Basic Settings Section 2 8 If CIDR is not enabled and a subnet mask is not set i e the default of 0 0 0 0 is set or an illegal value is set one of the following values will be set as the network mask according to the class of the local IP address olas JO Subnetmask Cassa 255000 Olas B 25525500 If classes are normally used it is recommended to set a subnet mask values corresponding to the class E Broadcast Settings Set the method for specifying IP addresses when broadcasting seming O cones All 1 4 3BSD Broadcast with all ones for Host ID 4 3BSD specifications Default All O 4 2BSD Broadcast with Host ID all zeros 4 2BSD specifications E Baud Rate Set the baud rate ing Tes Auto Default Automatically detects the baud rate between hubs Operates with 100Base TX full duplex whenever possible 10Base T Operates with 10Base
290. t address of the Ethernet Unit in the CMND 194 instruction 0000 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small No test data 7 3 5 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ Reads the results number of times data received of the broadcast test 08 02 Command code Command Response Times code code received The number of times the data has been received normally during the broad cast send test is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of times received is cleared each time the result is read Response code Description 0000 1001 Command too large 7 3 6 BROADCAST DATA SEND Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network Command Response Reference Command Block Parameters Test Data Command Precautions Section 7 3 Command Test data code This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 460 bytes can be specified No response is made to this command When using this command set the FINS header parameters or the control data for the CMND 194 instruction as follows Destination node address FF broadcast data Destination unit address FE Ethernet Unit Response no response flag 1 no response 7 3 7 ERROR LOG READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Beginning Record Number Command Number of Records Command Response Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response Reads the error log
291. t be fixed Automatic generation static setting Internal table Local FINS node number Must be fixed Local IP address Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command Ethernet IP address FINS response IP Address Table Method With this method FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based on a correspondence table IP address table that is preset in the Unit setup The IP address table is set using the CX Programmer in P Address Table under Settings in the Unit Setup It can be registered for nodes in different segments and with different network numbers The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the IP address table method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not changed dynamically For all others node the data from FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be dynami cally change
292. t segment Use the FINS UDP method between those nodes Note FINS UDP offers a slight advantage in performance e When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality e When the quality of connections is unreliable as with wireless LAN Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality 6 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet Oo lem Specifications 254 Number of nodes aooo Number of buffers Protocol name FINS UDP method e The selection OPP a ase UDP IP or TCP IP is made by means of the FINS TCP Tab in the CX Pro acca Unit Setup Number of connections Port number 9600 RE 9600 default Can A Can be changed O i Yes oe of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a server Items set foreach UDP _ Items set for each connection port e Server client specification e Broadcast e Remote IP address specification e IP address conversion When client Specify remote Ethernet Unit server IP address When server Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con nect e Automatic FINS node address allocation Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses e Keep alive Specify whether remote node keep alive is to be used TCP IP Setting e Remote node keep alive time Internal table This a table of correspondences for remote FINS
293. t the IP address correctly failed Bits 00 to 07 0107 Remote node not in network send del Check the connection to the mn Giuni _ Bits 08 to 14 remote De 0108 No Unit with specified unit Bits 00 to 07 Check the unit address at the address send failed remote node Troubleshoot the error in the CPU 010B CPU Unit error send failed 010D Destination address not in routing tables send failed 010E No routing table entry send failed 010F Routing table error send failed 0110 Too many relay points send failed 0111 Command too long send failed 0112 Header error send failed 0117 Internal buffers full packet dis carded 0118 Illegal packet discarded 0119 Local node busy send failed 0120 Unexpected routing error 0121 No setting in IP address table packet discarded 0122 Service not supported in current mode packet discarded 0123 Internal send buffer full packet discarded 0124 Maximum frame size exceeded routing failed 021A Logic error in setting table 01 Data link Recreate the data specified by the table 2nd byte of the detailed error 02 Network Code parameters 03 Routing tables 04 Unit Setup 05 CPU Bus Unit Words CIO DM 208 Unit using the PLC operation manual Set the destination address in the routing tables Set the local node remote node and relay nodes in the routing tables Create the routing tables correctly EN Reconstruct th
294. ta to be received is given in the com mand The number of bytes of data received will be stored in the results stor age area Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time will be unlimited if the value is set to 0 The IP address of the node sending data is stored in hexadecimal The port number of the node sending data The data sent from the remote node lf a packet is received which contains more bytes than the number specified in Number of reception bytes specified in the command the specified number of bytes will be stored and the remainder of the bytes will be discarded 1100 UDP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of range Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used witha CMND 490 instruction Results Storage Area Response Codes 0000 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS 0066 Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service 0080 A receive request timeout error occurred 0081 The specified socket was closed while receiving data 171 Command Response Reference Section 7 3
295. tatus Transi tions Number Status weaning O 0000000A TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum seg ment life 2MSL 0000 0105 Node address setting error Local IP address setting error IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE Writes the IP address table 187 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Command Block Response Block Parameters Number of Records Command IP Address Table Records Command Precautions Response Codes 188 A A y Command Number IP address 0777777777777 IP address code of records table records table records Command Response code code The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to O the IP address table will be cleared so that no records are registered Specify the IP address table records The number of records specified must be provided The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is cal culated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 1 6 bytes FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command hexadecimal IP Address IP address used by TCP IP protocol hexadecimal The new l O address table records will not be effective until the PC is restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset An error response will be ret
296. the Unit must be re started Click on Yes in the following dialog box Edit Parameters 2 It is necessary to restart the unit to do the transferred setting effectively Do you wish to restart the unit 8 Check the Ethernet Unit s LED indicators After the RUN indicator has turned OFF and then turned ON again the Ethernet will recognize the new settings i e the IP address in this case 2 7 2 Using the Web Browser Setting Function For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later the Ethernet Unit s system set tings can be set using the Web browser of a personal computer or other device The Ethernet Unit s Web window is displayed by accessing the follow ing URL from the Web browser URL http Ethernet Unit s IP address 0 Use the following procedure to set the Unit s system settings IP address in this example using Internet Explorer version 6 0 and the Ethernet Units Web function 43 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 1 23 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser In this example the URL is specified as http 192 168 250 1 0 using the Ethernet Unit s default IP address 4 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q E x e a Search 5 Favorites ES SS Ss Address E INERCIA OMRON Ethernet unit e Settings e Status View 0 Internet 2 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to displa
297. thernet C TCP UDP Ethernet Unit protocol CS CJ series CPU Unit TCP UDP Parameters protocol Ethernet Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit Overview of Communications Functions Executing CMND 490 Improved TCP Socket Interface Section 1 5 Another way to use socket services is to request a UDP or TCP socket ser vice by sending a FINS command to the Ethernet Unit by executing CMND 490 from the CPU Unit When the Ethernet Unit receives the socket service request it returns a response to the CPU Unit to confirm that it received the request and then begins the requested processing When the processing is completed the results are stored in the Results Storage Area in the CPU Unit Eight TCP ports and eight UDP ports can be used The TCP socket interface has been improved The size of received data accu mulated in the reception buffer is now stored and a Data Received Flag has been added enabling the TCP socket s receive program to be executed after the required data has been accumulated in the Ethernet Unit s reception buffer The keep alive setting has also been enabled for TCP socket services UNIX computer etc node with socket services interface Ethernet a fs 3 TCP UDP Ethernet Unit protocol CS CJ series EME CPU Unit Al ime Alo FINS commands Ol TCP protocol EL FINS a S responses Results Storage as Area UDP protocol 2 Processing results
298. thernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A y Bak gt x p Search Se Favorites 04 S EA 3 Address E http 192 168 250 1 00 vE Links gt OMRON Ethernet unit Settings Menu 1 IP address and Protocols 2 TP addressfrouter table o IP address table o TP router table 3 FINS TCP o Connection 1 8 o Connection 9 16 4 Send Mail o Mail address o Send Mail 5 Receive Mail 3 Select 1 IP address and Protocols System to display the Login Password field on the right of the window 3 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a 1 ni de z FF i re 3 gy Back gt xj e Un gt Search y y Favorites ES SS iz Address lt 2 http 1192 166 250 1 00 Please input Login Password Login Password OMRON Ethernet unit Settings Menu 1 TP address and Protocols o System o FTP Tht 250 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 4 5 Input the default password ETHERNET all in upper case and click the Login Button 4 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 5 i fi F E al woh 4 f i 33 y Back gt x Dy Search 9 p Favorites d4 z fp Address 2 http 192 168 250 1 00 OMRON Ethernet unit Please input Login Password Login Password conooson
299. this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations Safety Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N Caution Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Operating Environment Precautions 4 e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits N Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution Do
300. tically whenever the conditions are met Note The e mail functions require a separate mail server SMTP POP3 Automatic PLC Internal Clock Adjustment The built in clock of the PLC connected to the Ethernet can be automatically adjusted with the SNTP server clock taken as the standard Automatic adjust ments through the entire system enable the various records generated by pro duction equipment to be managed according to clock information and analyzed Note The automatic clock adjustment requires a separate SNTP server Specification of Servers by Host Name In addition to directly specifying the IP address for a SMTP POP3 or SNTP server itis also possible by means of the Ethernet Unit s DNS client function to specify the server by host name This enables automatic searches for IP addresses for purposes such as system checking even when the IP addresses for servers have been changed Note 1 A separate DNS server is required to specify servers by host name using DNS 2 The IP address is specified directly for the DNS server Classless IP Address Settings Using CIDR Starting from unit version 1 5 it is possible to use classless inter domain rout ing CIDR by specifying the subnet class using an option setting This enables greater flexibility in specification by eliminating the need to have the network ID component of the IP address be dependent on the class Use Web Function to Read Ethernet Unit Settings and Status A Web
301. time given priority Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with syn CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser asynchronous memory vicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral access port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual 153 154 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice peripheral servicing execution given priority time Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn 4 of CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with 1 ms max asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 2 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Et
302. ting 39 CX Net 39 CX Programmer 39 Programming Console 39 Protect using mail address field 72 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 192 protocols 16 ARP 16 DNS 16 FINS 16 FTP 16 ICMP 16 IP 16 POP3 16 reading status 192 SMTP 16 SNTP 16 TCP 16 TCP IP 8 UDP 16 UDP IP 8 257 R Racks mounting Ethernet Units 33 radioactivity XX111 RD indicator 26 Receive file with specified extension only field 73 Receive Mail Tab 52 72 Receive Request Switch 85 Receiving Flag 80 RECV 098 instruction 17 140 relay tables 124 RESET 161 response codes 227 FINS commands 158 UNIX error messages 231 Results Storage Area 159 response codes 231 Results Storage Error Flag 80 Retry timer field 66 Routing Table Area 12 routing tables creating 124 local network table 124 relay network table 124 setting examples 126 RUN indicator 26 troubleshooting 204 S safety precautions XX1l SD indicator 26 Send Error Log information field 71 Send file data I O memory data field 71 Send Mail Tab 51 70 Send Request Switch 85 Send status information field 71 Send user data field 71 SEND 090 instruction 17 139 transmission delay 149 Sending Flag 80 servers specifying 22 service status 82 Setup Tab 51 62 short circuits Index precautions xxiv signals precautions xxiv SMTP communications 16 SMTP server 5 22 SMTP Tab 51 67 SNTP communications 16 SN
303. ting online from the I O Table Window selecting the Ethernet Unit and then selecting Unit Setup Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted it reads and uses the contents of the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area as the settings for the com munications services If setting items for expanded functionality of the Ethernet Unit are not dis played make the settings after updating the Support Software using an auto update or by using the Web function of the Ethernet Unit Personal computer running Windows CX Programmer Unit Setup Ethernet Unit f E CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area a Mi eoe A CS CJ series CPU Unit OMRON Communications Units use OMRON s original FINS network system Make the settings for the FINS network and the relay path as required in the Routing Table Area allocated to the non volatile memory in the CPU Unit Use CX Integrator to make the settings CX Integrator is software that comes with the CX One and is automatically installed when the CX One is installed Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted it reads the contents of the Routing Table Area as the settings for FINS network Personal computer running Windows CX Integrator Routing table settings Ethernet Unit un de l ni L CS CJ series CPU Unit FinsGateway can be u
304. tinue to be made to the FINS TCP server every few seconds to open a connection After the Ethernet Unit is powered up or restarted the IP address for the con nection used as the FINS TCP client is the remote IP address set under the FINS TCP Tab in the Unit Setup To dynamically change the remote IP address i e during CPU Unit opera tion execute the CMND 490 instruction in the ladder program and send a FINS command FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST command code 27 30 hexadecimal to the Ethernet Unit Procedure for Using FINS TCP 1 Note Make the basic settings Refer to Section 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Net works y Make the settings in the Unit Setup With the CX Programmer connected online select the Ethernet Unit in the CX Program mer s I O Table Window Right click and select Unit Setup Then make the following set tings in the Unit Setup Window Setup Tab e FINS TCP port Default 9600 FINS TCP Tab e Remote IP addresses when client Note When functioning as a server set the permitted client IP addresses only when protection is in effect e Automatically allocated FINS node addresses Note The functions of these items are described in detail in the Operation Manual Con struction of Applications SECTION 7 Using FINS Communications to Create Host Applications Normally the defaults should be used e Keep alive setting Note Normally this shoul
305. tion Authorized Distributor
306. tion Executing from the host computer FINS commands with UDPAP or TCP IP headers enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations For example it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communi cations applications such as the CX Programmer and to perform remote pro gramming and monitoring See note Note Use CX Programmer version 4 0 to use TCP IP For lower versions of CX Pro grammer FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP IP Ethernet Unit The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on not only the same Ethernet network but on various other networks including SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link Upgraded Functions With the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 the following functions have been upgraded e The FINS communications service can be executed not only with UDP IP but also with TCP IP and it is even possible to use FINS communications with both UDP IP and TCP IP together on the same network Using TCP IP makes FINS communications highly reliable 17 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 e Even if the IP address and UDP port number of the host computer a DHCP client computer are changed it is still possible for the host com puter to send FINS commands to PLCs on the Ethernet network and to receive responses When UDP is used either the automatic generation dynami
307. tions Connecting within the same segment Use FINS UDP SECTION 6 FINS Communications Monitoring PLC Changes and Sending Equipment Status to the Operator by E mail Operation When the mail send function is used automatic communications applications via the Internet can be constructed relatively easily With this Ethernet Unit the following mail triggers can be set as PLC changes When these settings can be used no special ladder program is required for sending e mail e When a particular bit the Mail Send Switch turns ON e When values change in particular words lt gt lt lt gt gt e When a particular bit changes either OFF to ON or ON to OFF e When a change occurs at the Ethernet Unit stored in error log e When a change occurs at the CPU Unit e g a non fatal error a fatal error or a mode change e At regular intervals The following data can be sent by e mail e Text user created text strings ASCII data Ethernet Unit error log data and status data e Attached files IOM data created automatically by the Ethernet Unit data tables and files in File Memory To use the mail send function there must be a separate SMTP server on the network When using the SMTP server of an Internet Service Provider ISP security measures such as POP before or SMTP may be required This Unit handles POP before SMTP In addition to the IP address the host name used for the DNS service can be specified fo
308. tively After the transmission has been completed normally they become 0 1 and O If the transmission is ended with an error they become 1 1 and O Check this transmission status in the ladder program as required 87 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 TCP Socket No 1 to 8 Number of Bytes Received Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 m 1 to m 8 Number of Bytes Received 0000 to 07CO hex For each TCP socket the number of bytes of data in the reception buffer is stored in one word A maximum of 4 096 bytes of data can be held in the reception buffer but a value of only up to the maximum value 1 984 bytes that can be set for receive requests by manipulating control bits or using CMND 490 is stored 0000 hex O bytes 07CO hex 1 984 bytes The Data Received Flag in the CIO Area turns ON and OFF linked to this word This area is given a value of 0000 hex when a receive request is exe cuted by manipulating control bits or using the CMND 490 instruction If any data remains in the reception buffer after the receive request processing is completed the remaining number of bytes is stored and the Data Received Flag turns ON again Before a receive request is executed a check is performed to confirm that the required data is available TCP Socket No 1 to 8 Connection Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 m 9tomet Z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
309. to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 119 FINS TCP Method Section 6 3 6 3 FINS TCP Method 6 3 1 Overview FINS TCP Features The FINS TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP IP protocol TCP IP is a connection type communications protocol Before a message is sent from one node to another it is necessary to establish a vir tual circuit i e a connection Once a connection has been established com munications are quite reliable The arrival of data that is sent via the connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement ACK response and retries are executed automatically as required The FINS TCP method has been newly added to the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units When FINS TCP is used it must be determined which node is the server and which is the client For communications between a personal computer and a PLC the computer should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server For communi cations between two PLCs either one can be set as the client and the other as the server Node Client Node Server Request to establish a connection _ Connection established _ _ Acknowledgement Acknowl
310. to clear the error log the logs held in both RAM and EEPROM are cleared The following FINS commands can be used to read or clear the error log Refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units code 21 ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR 8 3 1 Error Log Error Codes The error codes are described in the following table The detailed error code will provide detailed information on an error Error Correction code mr O E Watchdog timer error in CPU Unit 00 00 Replace tne CPU Un Saved 0002 CPU Unit service monitor error 0006 Other CPU error Bit 11 Unit not in Registered Create the I O tables I O Tables Other bits are reserved for system use OOOF CPU Unit initialization error 00 00 Replace the CPU Unit 0010 Insufficient System Setup Area ON o Reduce the number of CPU Bus Units OT Replace the CPU Uni CPU Unit memory error 01 Read 03 Routing 01 Recreate the data specified by Saved error table the 2nd byte of the detailed error 02 Write 04 Setup code error error 02 Clear memory using proce 05 CPU Bus dure in the PLC operation manual Unit Words CIO DM 0013 CPU Unit protected Remove protection from CPU Unit Saved memory 207 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Detailed error code Correction EE code 1st byte 2nd byte PROM 0103 Resend count exceeded send Commands Check transceiver at remote node failed Bit 15 0105 Node address setting error send Bits 08 to 14 Se
311. truct a system with shielded twisted pair STP cable and hubs suitable for an FA environ ment e Do not lay the twisted pair cable together with high voltage lines e Do not lay the twisted pair cable near devices that generate noise 35 Network Installation Hub Installation Environment Precautions Hub Connection Methods Note Stack Connections 36 Section 2 4 e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants e Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise e Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants If more hub ports are required they can be added by connecting more than one hub There are two possible connection methods for hubs Cascade and stacked Cascade Connections e Connect two hubs to each other as follows Connect an MDI port to an MDI X port with a straight cable connect two MDI ports with a cross cable and connect two MDI X ports with a cross cable It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appear ance Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible e With
312. ts with the same port number 3 In contrast when the linger option is specified RST data will be sent when TCP is closed and closing will be performed immediately This en ables immediately opening TCP sockets with the same port number Data that was sent immediately before closing however is not checked for transmission to the remote node If the linger option is specified ensure the arrival of the send data in the application The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes 0 cannot be specified The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit s communications services can not be specified e TCP port No used for FTP server Default 20 21 e TCP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 e TCP port No used for SMTP server access Default 25 e TCP port No used for POP server access Default 110 e TCP port No used for HTTP server Default 80 175 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Timeout Value Command Remote IP Address Command Results Storage Area Remote Port Number Command Re
313. ts in the host ID are 0 or 1 e All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1 e All bits in the subnet ID are 1 e The IP address begins with 127 Ox7F 03 OFF Unit OFF when the IP address is normal IP address table error On if the IP address table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal 04 IP router table error ON if the IP router table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal 83 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Bt Error Status Manipulated by Unit operation 05 DNS server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during DNS server operation e An illegal server IP address is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server En owowa Re S SNTP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during SNTP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when SNTP server operation is normal SMTP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during SMTP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server e The verification time from the server has expired when POP before SMTP is set OFF when SMTP server operation is normal 13 POP server error ON Unit ON when the following errors occur during POP server operation e An illegal server IP address or host name is set e
314. ts the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When using the automatic generation method either dynamic or passive for address conversion set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ether net Unit to the same value as the node address If this is not possible either the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communi cations If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the ERC indicator will light If the node address is set to 00 the Unit operating mode change function will start This function changes the format for the Unit Setup in the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area when converting to a CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 Ether net Unit from one of the previous models CS1W ETNO1 11 or CJ1W ET11 For details refer to 2 11 Converting from Previous Models 31 Switch Settings Section 2 2 2 2 2 CJ series Ethernet Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a
315. urned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set for automatic generation 1003 The number of records specified does not match the sent data length 110C The number of records is not between 0 and 32 The FINS node address is not between 1 and 126 The IP address is O 2307 IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 22 IP ADDRESS WRITE Command Block Response Block Parameters IP Address Command Subnet Mask Command Response Codes Precautions Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Command IP address Subnet mask code 27 57 Command Response code code Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FFFFFF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal If 0 0 0 0 is specified the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled Example 150 31 2 83 96 1F 02 53 Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FFFFFF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Example 255 255 255 255 FF FF FF 00 Response code Description 0000 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small The local IP address and subnet mask set using this mask are written to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit The new local I
316. urs e The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next trans mission or reception e The Communications Port Error Flag turns OFF with the execution of the next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal comple tion 145 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Example Communications Port Enabled Flag Communications instruction SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 Communications Port Error Flag Communications Port Completion Code Completion 146 Instruction 3 being executed lt _ lt Instruction2 being executed lt gt gt Instruction 1 i being executed O E O 0000 0000 0000 0202 0000 Normal completion 0000 Normal completion Unit address setting error Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 6 6 5 Program Example Execution condition See note 0000 00 A202 07 1200 02 HA 1200 01 1200 00 MOV 21 000A D00000 MOV 21 0002 D00001 MOV 21 0400 D00002 MOV 21 0705 D00003 MOV 21 0064 D00004 XFER 70 000A 0000 D00010 SEND 90 D00010 D00020 D00000 1200 00 A202 07 See note DIFU 13 120001 1200 00 A219 07 HA Continued on next page When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and RECV 098 is not being executed the send execution program will start when execution condition CIO 0000 00 turns ON
317. used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 Note 3 Sending Mail e The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit s IP address to the SMTP server by mail via the intranet even if it as a private address e The TCP port number default 25 to be used for SMTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Also with some com munications companies there may be restrictions based on mail security considerations on using POP before SMTP 4 Receiving Mail e The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the POP3 server by mail via the intranet even if it as a private address e The TCP port number default 110 to be used for POP3 cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment e The PLC can acquire clock data through the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the SNTP server via the intranet even if it is a private address e The TCP port number default 123 to be used for SNTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 6 Host Name Designation e The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the DNS server via the intranet even if Ethernet Unit s IP address is a private address e The UDP TCP port number default 53 to be used for DNS cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Network Security an
318. used to monitor completion of reception of arrival Maximum value 64s confirmations when transferring data via socket services including FTP server and mail transfer TCP sockets If the timer setting is exceeded before arrival confirmation is received data is resent Resends are per formed from the first timeout 1 s through the 12th timeout 64 s An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout Continue timer Initial value The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send Maximum value 60s data but the send window is too small either O or too small to send the data and the remote node has not requested that communications be restarted Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote node when the continue timer times out The initial value of the timer is 5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas ingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached 2MSL timer 60s The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status IP reassemble timer A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 30 seconds ARP timer 20 min 3 min If a complete ARP table entry with an Ethernet address is not referred to for 20 minutes it is removed from the table An incomplete ARP table entry no response yet returned to the ARP request is removed from the table after 3 minutes Window size 4
319. ute the FINS communications service by TCP with up to 16 remote nodes Use IP address When this option is selected if the Ethernet Unit is Not pro to protect set for use as a server and if a connection number tected other than 0 0 0 0 is set for a destination IP address any connection request from other than the number set for that IP address will be denied Select this option to prevent faulty operation by FINS commands from specific nodes from affecting the PLC 64 FINS TCP Section 3 2 The following settings can be made for each connection number tem Defaul FINS TCP Mode For each connection number this setting specifies Server the Ethernet Unit for use as either a server or a cli ent e When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server The Ethernet Unit opens a connection with that connection number and waits for service requests FINS commands from clients Connection num bers are used in ascending order and allocated to clients in the order connections are made e When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client The Ethernet Unit establishes a connection with the server set as the destination IP address Once the connection has been established FINS TCP is used for FINS communications IP Address e When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server 0 0 0 0 If the option is selected to use IP addresses to pro tect set the IP addresses as required at clients from which connection is permitted If not set for t
320. will be generated for the READ IP ADDRESS TABLE command only Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 5 Network Relay Errors For network relay errors using SEND 090 or RECV 098 check the path of the command using the routing tables and the nature of the error using the response code to eliminate the cause of the error For network relay errors using CMND 490 the location of the relay error is recorded in the second through third words of the response as shown below First byte Second byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 First word Command code 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 4 3 2 Second word al response code MRES TE b response code aT Rel i 1 PLC non fatal error flag A 1 PLC fatal error flag 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Third word Error network address Error node address 8 5 Results Storage Area Response Codes The response codes stored in the Results Storage Area can be used to trou bleshoot socket service problems Refer to Socket Services Parameter Area 1 to 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit on page 88 for the location of the response codes stored in the Results Storage Area The UNIX socket service error messages corresponding to the response codes are given in the following table Refer to the documentation for the devices involved when communicating between an Ethernet Unit and other devices Response UNIX error Description Probable remedy code message 0003 ESRCH Close the local socket and try reopening it
321. work table settings for three different inter connected networks Relay Network Table End Relay network network Node Network A Network B Node ta wre Node Re ner Node ap Network C In the table for PLC 3 for example if network A is taken as the end net work then network B becomes the relay network and node c becomes the relay node If network C is taken as the end network then network B still becomes the relay network and node e becomes the relay node 126 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 m Example 3 All Nodes This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all nodes Unit 4 Node 5 Unit 7 Node 15 Network 30 Node 4 Unit 2 Node 3 Network 20 Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 5 Unit 6 Node 1 Node 2 Node 5 Node 10 PLC 1 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table o Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No Oj network network node 1 010 05 1 020 010 004 2 2 030 010 005 3 3 PLC 2 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No oj network network node 1 010 03 1 030 010 005 2 020 02 2 3 3 PLC 3 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit o network network node 1 020 010 0
322. ximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 33 Network Installation Section 2 4 CPU Rack 10 Units max FNG Covel z N PICI SPIC f f U A End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max PI S II Al gt Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted E Expansion Backplane 10 Units max Ma comer PI S All E Expansion Backplane 10 Units max MOVEL P S eee h PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit IC I O Control Unit Il 1 O Interface Unit The CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit s maximum current consumption is 370 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 2 4 Network Installation 2 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions e Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System being sure to follow ISO 8802 3 specifications You must obtain a copy of these specifi cations and be sure you understand them before attempting to install an Ethernet System Unless you are already experienced in installing com munications systems we strongly recommend that you employ a profes sional to install your system e Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise If noise prone environments are unavoidable be sure to take adequate measures against noise inte
323. y switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit If the defaults are used for the IP address and the Unit settings the set tings will be as shown below em Operation stats Setting the IP Address in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area This method sets the IP address in the IP Address Display Setting Area in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area when the IP address is not set in the Unit Setup When the IP address is set in the Unit Setup the IP Address Display Setting Area becomes the area for displaying the settings To make settings in the IP Address Display Setting Area use the CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to write the values In order for the new settings to go into effect either the Ethernet Unit must be restarted or the power must be turned ON again to the PLC 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 m 98 m 99 7 IP address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 hexadecimal If only the IP address is set according to the IP Address Display Setting Area and the defaults are used for all other Unit settings the settings will be as shown below IP address Words allocated for CPU Bus Unit m 98 to m 99 Subnet mask Uses value corresponding to IP address class Broadcast settings 4 3BSD specifications TCP IP keep alive 120 minutes IP router table Not set IP routing not supported 47 Basic Settings Section 2 8 Unit Setup This method sets the IP address by first selecting the Ether
324. y the Settings Menu 4 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Bak G B E gt y Search 5 Me Favorites 54 y S Ss Address http 192 168 250 1 00 OMRON Ethernet unit Settings Menu 1 TP address and Protocols HTTP TP address router table o IP address table o TP router table FINS TCP o Connection 1 8 o Connection 9 16 4 Send Mail o Mail address o Send Mail Receive Mail uy 44 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 3 Select 1 IP address and Protocols System to display the Login Pass word field on the right of the window 3 OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ss g i m hy j g key 2 a ed Ss r E i L 8 a E Back J W e mA Search PS Favorites a a Address E http 1192 168 250 1 00 Please input Login Password Login Password OMRON Ethernet unit Settings ienn TP address and Protocols o System RTE TARTI Ue 4 Input the default password ETHERNET all in upper case and click the Login Button A OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s fT ira E ks a r F Mad an i 33 y Back 4 x gt Dn y Search ES Favorites Es iz Address 2 http 1 192 168 250 1 00 Please input Login Passwo
325. ystem setup Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value The maximum values are as follows IP ICMP or UDP status 7FFFFFFF 2 147 483 647 decimal TC status FFFFFFFF 4 294 967 295 decimal 0000 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ Reads the status of the Ethernet Unit s network memory The network mem ory contains 248K bytes that are used as required as for communications buffers for communications servicing The network memory consists of 1 472 short buffers 128 bytes each and 64 long buffers 1 024 bytes each Refer to Appendix B Buffer Configuration Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Command Block 2763 Command code Response Block Command Response Memory status code code Parameters Memory Status A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order Each Response item consists of 4 bytes 1 2 3 1 Short Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes a The number of short buffers currently being used b The number of short buffers in the system fixed at 1 472 decimal 2 Short Buffer Application by Type Thirteen items are returned 52 bytes a The number of short buffers used for storing communications data b The number of short buffers used for protocol headers TCP UDP IP ICMP ARP The number of short buffers used in socket structures The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks The number of short buffers used for routing table
326. yte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The UDP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes 0 cannot be specified Packets received at this port are distributed to the socket specified in the UDP socket number and send packets are distrib uted from the UDP socket to this port The following ports for the Ethernet Unit s communications services cannot be specified e UDP port No used for FINS Default 9600 e UDP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 e UDP port No used for SNTP server access Default 123 0000 0105 Local IP address setting error 0302 CPU Unit error execution not possible 1001 Command too large 169 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description 1002 Command too small 1100 UDP socket number is out of range Local UDP port number is 0 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 1103 Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area 220F Specified socket is already open or is being closed 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 2240 Socket service mode is incorrect cannot execute service With unit version 1 5 or later the high speed socket service option was enabled and a socket service was used witha
327. ytes 15 11 87 0 cre mm Destination network number L Number of retries 0 to F Hex O to 15 retries af 57 Hex ee peel Communications port number 0 to 7 15 gs 2 Response cof 0 Required NN Tn Dro 1 Not required Destination Unit address 00 Hex CPU Unit 15 10 87 3 0 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 C45 El Hex Inner Board FE Hex Unit connected to network L Response monitor time 0000 Hex 2 s Destination node number N Da pare S 0 1 to 6 553 5 s 00 to FE Hex O to 254 l The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 141 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Commands Addressed to CS CJ series CPU Units The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed by a CS CJ series CPU Unit For details refer to the CS CJ series Program ma

CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents